1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children false
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
70 \font_sf_scale 100 100
71 \font_tt_scale 100 100
73 \use_dash_ligatures false
75 \default_output_format pdf2
77 \bibtex_command bibtex
78 \index_command default
82 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
83 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
87 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
88 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
89 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
94 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
95 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
98 \use_package amsmath 1
99 \use_package amssymb 1
100 \use_package cancel 1
102 \use_package mathdots 1
103 \use_package mathtools 1
104 \use_package mhchem 1
105 \use_package stackrel 1
106 \use_package stmaryrd 1
107 \use_package undertilde 1
109 \cite_engine_type default
113 \paperorientation portrait
118 \notefontcolor #0000ff
135 \paragraph_separation skip
138 \math_numbering_side default
139 \quotes_style english
143 \paperpagestyle default
144 \tracking_changes true
145 \output_changes false
149 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
160 by the \SpecialChar LyX
165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
167 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
168 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
169 Documentation mailing list:
170 \begin_inset CommandInset href
172 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
184 \begin_inset Newline newline
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
192 \begin_inset Note Note
195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
196 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
197 \begin_inset Newline newline
202 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
210 \begin_layout Standard
211 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
212 LatexCommand tableofcontents
219 \begin_layout Chapter
223 \begin_layout Section
224 What is \SpecialChar LyX
228 \begin_layout Standard
230 is a document preparation system.
231 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
232 scripts, publishable books, business
233 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
234 It is unlike most other
235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
242 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
244 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
260 pt type, left justified, 5
261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
270 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
274 \begin_layout Standard
275 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
280 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
284 \begin_layout Standard
289 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
290 's philosophy: most importantly,
291 the format of all of the manuals.
292 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
293 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
299 manual describes that, too.
302 \begin_layout Section
307 \begin_layout Standard
308 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
309 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
311 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
312 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
316 \begin_layout Standard
317 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
318 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
319 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
321 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
322 only a vertical scrollbar.
323 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
324 The first case is large images.
325 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
326 image and use the option
337 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
340 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
341 this doesn't work for equations yet.
344 \begin_layout Standard
345 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
346 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
354 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
361 \begin_layout Section
365 \begin_layout Standard
366 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
368 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
370 Just select the manual you want to read from the
377 \begin_layout Section
378 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
382 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
389 \begin_layout Standard
390 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
391 can be configured via the menu
393 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
397 \begin_inset Index idx
400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
407 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
410 packages are available.
411 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
413 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
415 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
420 \begin_inset space \space{}
423 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
424 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
426 To force \SpecialChar LyX
427 to re-inspect your system, you should use
429 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
433 \begin_inset Index idx
436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
437 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
443 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
444 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
447 \begin_layout Section
450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
452 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
459 \begin_layout Standard
460 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
461 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
462 installed, but you will not be
463 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
464 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
465 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
466 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
467 document can always be output as plain text
471 \begin_layout Standard
472 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
473 or DocBook classes or packages.
474 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
475 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
478 \begin_layout Standard
479 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
480 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
481 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
484 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
493 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
496 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
500 \begin_inset Index idx
503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
504 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
512 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
519 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
523 \begin_layout Chapter
524 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
528 \begin_layout Section
529 Basic File Operations
530 \begin_inset Index idx
533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
542 \begin_layout Standard
547 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
548 in addition to some more advanced operations:
551 \begin_layout Itemize
573 \begin_layout Itemize
589 arg "buffer-new-template"
595 \begin_layout Itemize
617 \begin_layout Itemize
627 \begin_layout Itemize
641 \begin_layout Itemize
663 \begin_layout Itemize
675 arg "buffer-write-as"
681 \begin_layout Itemize
695 \begin_layout Itemize
709 \begin_layout Standard
710 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
711 a few minor differences.
714 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
725 command lists the available templates.
726 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
727 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
728 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
736 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
743 \begin_layout Standard
744 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
776 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
777 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
778 is just that — a big, blank space.
786 \begin_layout Standard
807 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
812 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
815 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
833 will reload the document from disk.
834 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
835 and want to restore it to the last save.
844 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
845 them as your changes.
848 \begin_layout Section
849 Basic Editing Features
850 \begin_inset Index idx
853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
862 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
869 \begin_layout Standard
870 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
871 can perform cut and paste operations
872 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
873 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
874 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
875 editing features and how to access
877 We will start with cut and paste.
880 \begin_layout Standard
881 As you might expect, the
885 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
886 various other editing features.
887 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
891 \begin_layout Itemize
897 \begin_inset Index idx
900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
929 \begin_layout Itemize
935 \begin_inset Index idx
938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
967 \begin_layout Itemize
973 \begin_inset Index idx
976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1001 \begin_layout Itemize
1005 \begin_inset space ~
1011 \begin_layout Itemize
1015 \begin_inset space ~
1021 \begin_layout Itemize
1025 \begin_inset space ~
1029 \begin_inset space ~
1035 \begin_inset Index idx
1038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1047 \begin_inset Index idx
1050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1065 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1075 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1081 \begin_layout Standard
1082 The first three are self-explanatory.
1083 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1084 and other programs by
1105 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1106 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1111 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1112 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1113 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1114 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1115 into individual cells.
1119 \begin_inset space ~
1124 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1125 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1129 \begin_layout Standard
1133 \begin_inset space ~
1138 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1140 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1142 \begin_inset space ~
1149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1155 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1156 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1157 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1163 \begin_inset space \space{}
1166 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1167 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1170 \begin_inset space ~
1173 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1175 \begin_inset space ~
1179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1183 \begin_inset space ~
1192 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1193 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1195 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1204 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1205 start a new paragraph.
1206 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1207 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1212 \begin_inset space ~
1215 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1229 \begin_inset space ~
1232 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1235 paste from the primary selection.
1236 This is normally the currently selected text.
1239 \begin_layout Standard
1242 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1248 \begin_inset space ~
1256 \begin_inset space ~
1260 \begin_inset space ~
1266 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1272 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1275 \begin_inset space ~
1284 \begin_inset space ~
1289 button to skip the current word.
1293 \begin_inset space ~
1298 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1302 \begin_inset space ~
1307 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1309 If the toggle is set, searching for
1310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1321 will not match the word
1322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1336 Match whole words only
1338 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1339 to only find complete words, e.
1340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1369 offers also an advanced
1372 \begin_inset space ~
1376 \begin_inset space ~
1381 feature that is described in section
1382 \begin_inset space ~
1386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1388 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1395 \begin_layout Standard
1396 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1397 \begin_inset space \space{}
1401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1409 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1411 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1416 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1423 \begin_layout Standard
1427 arg "inset-select-all"
1430 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1431 When the cursor is inside an inset
1434 arg "inset-select-all"
1437 selects the content of the inset.
1441 arg "inset-select-all"
1444 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1449 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1452 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1456 \begin_layout Section
1458 \begin_inset Index idx
1461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1468 \begin_inset Index idx
1471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1480 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1487 \begin_layout Standard
1488 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1490 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1493 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1496 or the toolbar button
1502 to undo some mistake.
1503 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1505 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1508 or the toolbar button
1515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1522 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1526 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1529 \begin_layout Standard
1530 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1539 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1540 This is a consequence of the 100
1541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1544 step undo limit mentioned above.
1547 \begin_layout Standard
1556 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1558 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1562 \begin_layout Section
1564 \begin_inset Index idx
1567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1576 \begin_layout Standard
1577 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1580 \begin_layout Enumerate
1585 \begin_layout Itemize
1590 once anywhere in the edit window.
1591 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1595 \begin_layout Enumerate
1600 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1614 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1617 \begin_layout Itemize
1618 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1621 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1628 \begin_layout Enumerate
1629 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1633 \begin_layout Standard
1634 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1635 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1639 \begin_layout Section
1641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1643 name "sec:Navigating"
1648 \begin_inset Index idx
1651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1660 \begin_layout Standard
1662 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1665 \begin_layout Itemize
1670 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1671 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1674 \begin_layout Itemize
1675 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1677 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1679 \begin_inset space ~
1684 or by the toolbar button
1687 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1693 \begin_layout Itemize
1694 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1696 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1699 and use the same menu to return to them.
1700 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1703 \begin_layout Standard
1707 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1712 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1713 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1715 \begin_inset space ~
1720 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1721 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1722 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1723 your last editing position.
1726 \begin_layout Standard
1731 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1735 \begin_layout Subsection
1737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1739 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1744 \begin_inset Index idx
1747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1748 Navigating ! Outline
1754 \begin_inset Index idx
1757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1766 \begin_layout Standard
1767 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1768 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1769 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1771 \begin_inset space ~
1775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1777 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1781 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1782 \begin_inset space ~
1786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1788 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1793 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1797 \begin_layout Standard
1798 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1799 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1800 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1801 dialog and to modify the citation.
1804 \begin_layout Standard
1809 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1810 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1812 Labels and References
1814 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1823 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1826 \begin_layout Standard
1827 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1828 you further to control the display.
1833 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1834 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1840 option keeps it in the current view state.
1841 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1842 \begin_inset space ~
1845 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1846 \begin_inset space ~
1849 3, the subsections of sections
1850 \begin_inset space ~
1853 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1858 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1859 \begin_inset space ~
1863 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1873 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1876 \begin_layout Standard
1883 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1884 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1898 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1899 So, for example, you can move section
1900 \begin_inset space ~
1904 \begin_inset space ~
1907 2.4 or after section
1908 \begin_inset space ~
1913 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Standard
1951 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1952 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1955 \begin_layout Subsection
1956 Horizontal Scrolling
1957 \begin_inset Index idx
1960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1961 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1969 \begin_layout Standard
1971 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1977 \begin_inset space \space{}
1981 \begin_inset space ~
1984 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1985 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1986 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1990 \begin_layout Standard
1991 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1995 \begin_layout Itemize
1997 is used on a small tablet computer
2000 \begin_layout Itemize
2001 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2013 \begin_inset space ~
2026 \begin_layout Itemize
2027 Math constructs with long command names
2030 \begin_layout Standard
2031 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2032 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2034 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2035 windows so that table
2036 \begin_inset space ~
2040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2042 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2047 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2049 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2050 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2053 \begin_layout Standard
2054 \begin_inset Float table
2060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2061 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2066 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2070 Horizontal scrolling test.
2078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2080 \begin_inset Tabular
2081 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2082 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2127 \begin_layout Section
2128 Input/Word Completion
2129 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2131 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2136 \begin_inset Index idx
2139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2146 \begin_inset Index idx
2149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2180 \begin_layout Standard
2182 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2184 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2185 is used to propose completions.
2188 \begin_layout Standard
2189 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2192 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2197 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2204 \begin_inset space ~
2208 \begin_inset space ~
2213 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2217 \begin_inset space ~
2222 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2223 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2227 \begin_inset space ~
2233 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2234 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2235 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2236 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2239 \begin_layout Standard
2241 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2242 completions available.
2247 key to accept a proposed completion.
2248 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2249 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2250 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2257 \begin_layout Standard
2258 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2259 ing options for text.
2260 The special math option
2264 enables characters to be composed.
2265 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2266 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2269 , you can then input the characters
2270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2281 to a formula to get it.
2282 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2283 of the math toolbar.
2284 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2288 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2289 's installation folder.
2290 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2299 \begin_layout Section
2301 \begin_inset Index idx
2304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2311 \begin_inset Index idx
2314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2343 \begin_inset Index idx
2346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2377 \begin_layout Standard
2378 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2392 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2395 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2399 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2400 \begin_inset space ~
2404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2406 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2413 \begin_layout Standard
2417 \begin_inset space ~
2425 \begin_inset space ~
2446 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2450 \begin_layout Labeling
2451 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2455 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2456 LatexCommand nomenclature
2458 description "Tabulator key"
2465 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2467 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2468 \begin_inset space ~
2472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2474 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2481 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2485 , especially section
2486 \begin_inset space ~
2490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2492 reference "subsec:Lists"
2498 If you are still confused, look in the
2503 \begin_inset Newline newline
2511 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2512 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2516 \begin_layout Labeling
2517 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2521 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2522 LatexCommand nomenclature
2524 description "Escape key"
2532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2539 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2540 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2543 \begin_layout Labeling
2544 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2550 \begin_inset space ~
2554 \begin_inset space ~
2561 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2562 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2566 \begin_layout Standard
2567 There are three modifier keys:
2570 \begin_layout Labeling
2571 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2589 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2590 LatexCommand nomenclature
2592 description "Control key"
2597 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2598 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2602 \begin_layout Itemize
2611 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2614 \begin_layout Itemize
2623 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2626 \begin_layout Itemize
2635 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2639 \begin_layout Labeling
2640 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2658 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2659 LatexCommand nomenclature
2661 description "Shift key"
2666 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2667 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2670 \begin_layout Labeling
2671 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2689 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2690 LatexCommand nomenclature
2692 description "Alt or Meta key"
2697 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2698 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2699 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2705 \begin_inset Newline newline
2708 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2710 menu accelerator keys
2713 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2714 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2718 \begin_layout Standard
2719 For example, the sequence
2720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2726 \begin_inset space ~
2730 \begin_inset space ~
2736 \begin_inset space ~
2744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2763 \begin_inset space ~
2769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2779 \begin_layout Standard
2784 manual lists all other things bound to the
2792 \begin_layout Standard
2793 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2795 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2796 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2797 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2798 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2799 The \SpecialChar LyX
2800 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2801 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2802 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2804 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2820 followed by a capital
2827 \begin_layout Chapter
2830 \begin_inset Index idx
2833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2843 \begin_layout Section
2845 \begin_inset Index idx
2848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2857 \begin_layout Subsection
2861 \begin_layout Standard
2862 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2863 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2864 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2865 numbering schemes, and so on.
2866 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2867 and format the title of your document differently.
2870 \begin_layout Standard
2875 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2876 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2877 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2878 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2879 picks one for you by default.
2880 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2883 \begin_layout Subsection
2885 \begin_inset Index idx
2888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2895 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2897 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2904 \begin_layout Standard
2905 You can select a class using the
2907 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2908 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2912 \begin_inset Index idx
2915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2922 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2926 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2930 \begin_layout Standard
2931 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2936 \begin_layout Description
2937 Article for basic articles
2940 \begin_layout Description
2941 Report for basic reports
2944 \begin_layout Description
2945 Book for writing a book
2948 \begin_layout Description
2949 Letter for US-style letters
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2953 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2954 only uses if you have installed
2955 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2956 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2957 distributions will include
2959 Here are some of the classes.
2960 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2962 Special Document Classes
2971 \begin_layout Description
2972 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2975 \begin_layout Description
2976 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2980 \begin_layout Description
2981 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2985 \begin_layout Description
2986 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2987 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2988 There are three article layouts available.
2989 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2990 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2991 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2992 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2997 sequential numbering
2998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3001 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3002 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3003 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3004 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3007 \begin_layout Description
3008 Beamer Layout for presentations
3011 \begin_layout Description
3012 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3013 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3014 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3015 with \SpecialChar LyX
3019 \begin_layout Description
3020 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3023 \begin_layout Description
3025 \begin_inset space ~
3028 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3031 \begin_layout Description
3032 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3035 \begin_layout Description
3036 Foils Used to make transparencies
3039 \begin_layout Description
3040 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3041 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3042 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3043 with \SpecialChar LyX
3047 \begin_layout Description
3048 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3049 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3052 \begin_layout Description
3053 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3056 \begin_layout Description
3057 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3060 \begin_layout Description
3061 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3062 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3063 (Is used by this document.)
3066 \begin_layout Description
3067 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3070 \begin_layout Description
3071 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3074 \begin_layout Description
3079 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3080 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3082 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3086 \begin_layout Description
3087 Slides Used to make transparencies
3090 \begin_layout Description
3092 \begin_inset space ~
3095 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3096 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3099 \begin_layout Description
3100 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3103 \begin_layout Standard
3104 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3106 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3108 Special Document Classes
3115 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3116 of the document classes.
3119 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3123 \begin_layout Standard
3124 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3126 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3127 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3129 \begin_inset Index idx
3132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3149 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3150 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3152 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3155 \begin_layout Standard
3158 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3163 , are highly specialized.
3165 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3166 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3167 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3168 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3169 by some document class.
3170 There are just too many of them.
3171 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3174 \begin_layout Standard
3175 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3183 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3184 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3185 document class for a new file.
3187 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3190 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3197 manual for information on how to install them.
3198 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3204 \begin_layout Standard
3205 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3206 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3207 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3208 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3209 class files to be used for dissertation
3210 s submitted to those universities.
3211 The \SpecialChar LyX
3212 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3214 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3218 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3224 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3227 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3231 name "subsec:Modules"
3236 \begin_inset Index idx
3239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3248 \begin_layout Standard
3249 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3250 chosen document class.
3251 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3252 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3259 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3263 \begin_inset Index idx
3266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3273 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3277 \begin_layout Standard
3278 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3279 packages or file format converters that are not always
3280 installed by default.
3282 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3283 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3284 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3285 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3287 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3288 file without the missing prerequisites.
3289 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3290 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3293 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3297 \begin_inset Index idx
3300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3301 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3307 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3312 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3315 \begin_layout Standard
3316 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3324 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3326 will advise you about these things.
3334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3338 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3343 \begin_inset Index idx
3346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3347 Document ! Local Layout
3355 \begin_layout Standard
3356 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3357 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3358 : They are intended to be used in
3359 a variety of different documents.
3360 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3361 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3362 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3363 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3364 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3366 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3384 manual for information on how to use it.
3387 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3391 \begin_layout Standard
3392 Each class has a default set of options.
3393 Here's a quick table describing them:
3396 \begin_layout Standard
3397 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3403 \begin_layout Standard
3405 \begin_inset Tabular
3406 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3407 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3412 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3866 \begin_layout Standard
3867 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3873 \begin_layout Standard
3874 You're probably also wondering what
3875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3879 \begin_inset space ~
3883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3887 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3888 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3893 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3898 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3908 headings, there are also
3916 headings, and so on.
3917 We will describe these headings fully in section
3918 \begin_inset space ~
3922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3924 reference "subsec:Headings"
3931 \begin_layout Subsection
3933 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3935 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3940 \begin_inset Index idx
3943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3950 \begin_inset Index idx
3953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3962 \begin_layout Standard
3963 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3965 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3972 \begin_inset space ~
3980 \begin_inset space ~
3985 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3987 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3988 doesn't support special options you want to
3989 use for your document.
3990 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3991 -class and its options, you have to read
3995 \begin_layout Standard
3999 \begin_inset space ~
4006 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4012 \begin_inset space ~
4017 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4018 You can choose between the following five options:
4021 \begin_layout Labeling
4022 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4027 Use default page style of current class.
4030 \begin_layout Labeling
4031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4036 No page numbers or headings.
4039 \begin_layout Labeling
4040 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4048 \begin_layout Labeling
4049 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4054 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4055 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4056 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4057 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4060 \begin_layout Labeling
4061 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4066 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4067 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4073 \begin_inset Index idx
4076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4084 How they are defined is explained in section
4085 \begin_inset space ~
4089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4091 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4098 \begin_layout Standard
4099 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4100 \begin_inset space ~
4104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4106 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4113 \begin_layout Subsection
4114 Paper Size and Orientation
4115 \begin_inset Index idx
4118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4119 Document ! Paper size
4125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4127 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4134 \begin_layout Standard
4135 You can find the following options in the menu
4138 \begin_inset space ~
4145 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4149 \begin_inset Index idx
4152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4161 \begin_layout Labeling
4162 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4166 \begin_inset space ~
4171 What size paper to print on.
4176 \begin_layout Itemize
4182 \begin_layout Itemize
4188 \begin_layout Itemize
4194 \begin_layout Itemize
4200 \begin_layout Itemize
4203 US letter, US legal, US executive
4206 \begin_layout Itemize
4212 \begin_layout Itemize
4219 \begin_layout Labeling
4220 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4225 To choose whether to output as
4236 \begin_layout Labeling
4237 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4241 \begin_inset space ~
4246 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4247 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4250 \begin_layout Subsection
4252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4254 name "subsec:Margins"
4259 \begin_inset Index idx
4262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4269 \begin_inset Index idx
4272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4281 \begin_layout Standard
4282 Paper margins are set in the menu
4284 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4288 \begin_inset Index idx
4291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4300 \begin_layout Standard
4301 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4302 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4303 the paper format and the font size into account.
4306 \begin_layout Subsection
4310 \begin_layout Standard
4311 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4317 That includes the paragraph environments.
4318 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4319 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4320 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4322 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4331 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4333 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4334 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4335 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4338 \begin_layout Section
4339 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4340 \begin_inset Index idx
4343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4344 Paragraph ! Indentation
4352 \begin_layout Subsection
4354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4356 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4363 \begin_layout Standard
4364 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4365 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4368 \begin_layout Standard
4369 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4370 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4371 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4372 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4376 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4382 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4383 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4384 language than English.
4386 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4389 \begin_layout Standard
4390 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4391 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4392 into \SpecialChar LyX
4394 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4397 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4399 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4400 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4401 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4408 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4409 goes to produce a printable file.
4414 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4416 gives you the ability globally to change
4420 these pre-coded spacings.
4421 We will explain more later.
4424 \begin_layout Subsection
4425 Paragraph Separation
4426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4428 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4433 \begin_inset Index idx
4436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4437 Paragraph ! Separation
4445 \begin_layout Standard
4453 \begin_inset space ~
4461 \begin_inset space ~
4468 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4472 \begin_inset Index idx
4475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4481 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4484 \begin_layout Subsection
4488 \begin_layout Standard
4489 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4494 \begin_inset space ~
4499 dialog and toggle the
4502 \begin_inset space ~
4507 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4510 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4514 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4515 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4519 \begin_layout Standard
4520 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4521 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4524 \begin_layout Subsection
4526 \begin_inset Index idx
4529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4530 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4538 \begin_layout Standard
4541 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4545 \begin_inset Index idx
4548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4557 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4561 \begin_inset space ~
4570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4571 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4577 \begin_inset Index idx
4580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4587 installed to use this feature.
4592 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4594 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4596 \begin_inset space ~
4601 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4602 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4605 \begin_layout Section
4606 Paragraph Environments
4607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4609 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4614 \begin_inset Index idx
4617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4618 Paragraph ! Environments
4624 \begin_inset Index idx
4627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4628 Paragraph environments|(
4636 \begin_layout Subsection
4640 \begin_layout Standard
4641 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4644 \begin_layout Standard
4653 } \SpecialChar ldots
4663 \begin_inset Newline newline
4666 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4668 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4669 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4670 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4679 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4682 \begin_layout Standard
4683 A paragraph environment is simply a
4684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4691 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4692 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4693 scheme, labels, and so on.
4694 Additionally, you can
4695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4702 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4703 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4704 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4705 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4707 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4709 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4712 \begin_layout Standard
4713 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4714 \begin_inset Graphics
4715 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4721 at the left end of the toolbar.
4723 will change the environment of the
4727 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4728 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4729 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4733 \begin_layout Standard
4742 create a new paragraph using the
4746 paragraph environment.
4748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4755 because if you are in one of these environments:
4758 \begin_layout Itemize
4764 \begin_layout Itemize
4770 \begin_layout Itemize
4776 \begin_layout Itemize
4782 \begin_layout Itemize
4788 \begin_layout Itemize
4794 \begin_layout Itemize
4800 \begin_layout Standard
4802 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4806 , rather than resetting it to
4811 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4812 \begin_inset space ~
4816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4818 reference "sec:Nesting"
4825 \begin_layout Subsection
4829 \begin_layout Standard
4830 The default paragraph environment is
4835 It creates a plain paragraph.
4837 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4838 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4839 this manual) are in the
4846 \begin_layout Standard
4847 You can nest a paragraph using the
4851 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4859 \begin_layout Subsection
4861 \begin_inset Index idx
4864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4873 \begin_layout Standard
4874 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4875 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4884 for thanks or contact information.
4885 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4886 places all of this on a separate page
4887 along with today's date.
4888 For other types of documents, the title
4889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4896 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4900 \begin_layout Standard
4902 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4916 Here's how you use them:
4919 \begin_layout Itemize
4920 Put the title of your document in the
4927 \begin_layout Itemize
4928 Put the author name in the
4935 \begin_layout Itemize
4936 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4937 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4943 Note that using this environment is optional.
4944 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4945 will automatically insert today's date.
4946 If you don't want a date, use the option
4948 Suppress default date on front page
4952 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4953 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4955 \begin_inset space ~
4963 \begin_layout Standard
4964 You can use footnotes to insert
4965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4972 or contact information.
4975 \begin_layout Subsection
4977 \begin_inset Index idx
4980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4989 name "subsec:Headings"
4996 \begin_layout Standard
4997 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4999 takes care of the numbering for you.
5002 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5004 \begin_inset Index idx
5007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5008 Section headings ! Numbered
5016 \begin_layout Standard
5017 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5021 \begin_layout Enumerate
5027 \begin_layout Enumerate
5033 \begin_layout Enumerate
5039 \begin_layout Enumerate
5045 \begin_layout Enumerate
5051 \begin_layout Enumerate
5057 \begin_layout Enumerate
5063 \begin_layout Standard
5065 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5066 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5067 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5070 \begin_layout Standard
5071 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5072 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5073 You group the book into chapters.
5075 does a similar grouping:
5078 \begin_layout Itemize
5083 is divided into either
5094 \begin_layout Itemize
5106 \begin_layout Itemize
5118 \begin_layout Itemize
5130 \begin_layout Itemize
5142 \begin_layout Itemize
5154 \begin_layout Standard
5155 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5163 Not all document types use the
5167 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5172 is the top-level heading.
5180 \begin_layout Standard
5185 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5186 labels it with its number,
5187 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5189 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5201 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5203 \begin_inset Index idx
5206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5207 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5215 \begin_layout Standard
5216 The unnumbered section headings have a
5217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5224 at the end of their name.
5225 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5226 the table of contents, see section
5227 \begin_inset space ~
5231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5240 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5241 Changing the Numbering
5242 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5244 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5251 \begin_layout Standard
5252 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5253 in the Table of Contents.
5254 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5256 Just as certain classes start with
5270 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5280 This is something you can change.
5283 \begin_layout Standard
5286 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5290 \begin_inset Index idx
5293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5302 \begin_inset space ~
5306 \begin_inset space ~
5311 you will see two counters.
5316 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5317 numbers a section heading.
5318 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5322 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5323 Short Titles of Headings
5324 \begin_inset Index idx
5327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5328 Section headings ! Short titles
5334 \begin_inset Argument 1
5337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5346 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5353 \begin_layout Standard
5354 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5355 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5356 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5357 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5360 \begin_layout Standard
5362 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5363 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5364 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5365 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5368 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5370 \begin_inset space ~
5376 This will insert a box labeled
5377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5381 \begin_inset space ~
5385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5388 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5389 This also works for captions inside floats.
5390 There can only be one short title per title.
5393 \begin_layout Standard
5394 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5397 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5401 \begin_layout Standard
5402 The following information applies to all section headings:
5405 \begin_layout Itemize
5406 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5409 \begin_layout Itemize
5410 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5413 \begin_layout Itemize
5414 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5417 \begin_layout Itemize
5418 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5421 \begin_layout Subsection
5425 \begin_layout Standard
5427 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5441 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5442 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5443 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5444 the text they contain.
5445 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5453 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5456 \begin_layout Standard
5457 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5466 when you start a new paragraph.
5467 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5471 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5472 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5473 have to change back to the
5477 environment yourself.
5480 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5489 \begin_inset Index idx
5492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5501 \begin_layout Standard
5502 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5503 time for the differences.
5512 are identical except for one difference:
5516 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5525 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5528 \begin_layout Standard
5529 Here's an example of the
5542 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5544 See – no indentation!
5548 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5549 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5550 the other paragraph.
5553 \begin_layout Standard
5554 Here's another example, this time in the
5561 \begin_layout Quotation
5567 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5568 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5569 the first line, then
5573 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5577 you were quoting other text.
5580 \begin_layout Quotation
5581 Here's a new paragraph.
5582 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5583 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5586 \begin_layout Standard
5587 As the examples show,
5591 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5592 They should put quotes in the
5597 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5601 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5606 \begin_inset Index idx
5609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5616 \begin_inset Index idx
5619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5635 \begin_layout Standard
5640 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5646 \begin_inset Newline newline
5649 Which I did not rehearse!
5653 It could be much worse.
5654 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5656 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5657 indented a bit more than the first.
5658 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5664 \begin_inset Newline newline
5667 And make things look fine
5668 \begin_inset Newline newline
5674 arg "newline-insert newline"
5680 \begin_layout Standard
5685 does not indent both margins.
5686 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5687 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5690 arg "newline-insert newline"
5696 \begin_layout Subsection
5698 \begin_inset Index idx
5701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5717 \begin_layout Standard
5719 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5729 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5730 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5739 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5740 lets you provide your own label.
5741 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5742 describing some general features of all four of them.
5745 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5749 \begin_layout Standard
5750 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5752 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5753 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5762 reset the environment to
5766 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5767 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5768 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5772 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5776 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5783 \begin_layout Standard
5784 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5785 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5786 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5788 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5789 you read all of section
5790 \begin_inset space ~
5794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5796 reference "sec:Nesting"
5803 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5805 \begin_inset Index idx
5808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5824 \begin_layout Standard
5825 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5829 paragraph environment.
5830 It has the following properties:
5833 \begin_layout Itemize
5834 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5838 \begin_layout Itemize
5840 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5843 \begin_layout Itemize
5844 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5848 \begin_layout Itemize
5849 The items can have any length.
5851 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5852 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5859 \begin_layout Itemize
5864 environment inside another
5868 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5872 \begin_layout Itemize
5873 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5876 \begin_layout Itemize
5878 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5881 \begin_layout Itemize
5883 \begin_inset space ~
5887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5889 reference "sec:Nesting"
5893 for a full explanation of nesting.
5897 \begin_layout Standard
5898 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5907 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5910 \begin_layout Standard
5911 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5912 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5915 \begin_layout Itemize
5916 The label for the first level
5920 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5924 \begin_layout Itemize
5925 The label for the second level is a dash.
5929 \begin_layout Itemize
5930 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5934 \begin_layout Itemize
5935 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5939 \begin_layout Itemize
5940 Back out to the third level.
5944 \begin_layout Itemize
5945 Back to the second level.
5949 \begin_layout Itemize
5950 Back to the outermost level.
5953 \begin_layout Standard
5954 These are the default labels for an
5959 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5961 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5964 dialog in the submenu
5969 \begin_inset Index idx
5972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5978 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5982 \begin_layout Standard
5983 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5984 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5986 \begin_inset space ~
5990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5992 reference "sec:Nesting"
5999 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6001 \begin_inset Index idx
6004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6013 name "sec:Enumerate"
6020 \begin_layout Standard
6025 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6026 It has these properties:
6029 \begin_layout Enumerate
6030 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6034 \begin_layout Enumerate
6035 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6039 \begin_layout Enumerate
6041 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6044 \begin_layout Enumerate
6049 environment resets the counter to one.
6052 \begin_layout Enumerate
6065 \begin_layout Enumerate
6066 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6067 Items can have any length.
6070 \begin_layout Enumerate
6071 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6074 \begin_layout Enumerate
6075 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6078 \begin_layout Enumerate
6079 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6083 \begin_layout Standard
6092 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6094 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6095 labels the four different levels in an
6102 \begin_layout Enumerate
6103 The first level of an
6107 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6111 \begin_layout Enumerate
6112 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6116 \begin_layout Enumerate
6117 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6121 \begin_layout Enumerate
6122 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6125 \begin_layout Enumerate
6126 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6131 \begin_layout Enumerate
6132 Back to the third level
6136 \begin_layout Enumerate
6137 Back to the second level.
6141 \begin_layout Enumerate
6142 Back to the outermost level.
6145 \begin_layout Standard
6146 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6150 environment, see section
6151 \begin_inset space ~
6155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6157 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6162 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6166 \begin_layout Standard
6167 There is more to nesting
6171 environments than we've stated here.
6172 You should read section
6173 \begin_inset space ~
6177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6179 reference "sec:Nesting"
6183 to learn more about nesting.
6186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6188 \begin_inset Index idx
6191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6200 \begin_layout Standard
6201 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6205 list has no fixed label.
6206 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6215 of the first line as the label.
6219 \begin_layout Description
6220 Example: This is an example of the
6227 \begin_layout Standard
6229 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6233 \begin_layout Standard
6235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6242 it is meant that the first usage of the
6246 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6248 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6256 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6261 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6262 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6264 \begin_inset space ~
6270 \begin_inset space ~
6274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6276 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6280 for more information.) Here is an example:
6283 \begin_layout Description
6285 \begin_inset space ~
6288 Example: This one shows how to use a
6291 \begin_inset space ~
6303 \begin_layout Description
6304 Usage: You should use the
6308 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6309 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6311 It's not a good idea to use a
6315 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6316 You're better off using
6328 paragraphs into them.
6331 \begin_layout Description
6332 Nesting: You can nest
6336 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6340 \begin_layout Standard
6341 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6342 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6343 them from the first line.
6346 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6348 \begin_inset Index idx
6351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6360 \begin_layout Standard
6365 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6366 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6370 \begin_layout Standard
6379 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6381 Here are its properties:
6384 \begin_layout Labeling
6385 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6387 \begin_inset space ~
6390 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6399 of each line as the item label.
6404 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6405 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6406 space as described above.
6409 \begin_layout Labeling
6410 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6411 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6412 uses different margins for the item label and the
6413 body of the item text.
6414 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6415 label width plus a little extra space.
6419 \begin_layout Labeling
6420 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6422 \begin_inset space ~
6425 width \SpecialChar LyX
6426 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6427 If the label width is larger, the label
6428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6435 into the first line.
6436 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6437 margin of the rest of the item text.
6440 \begin_layout Labeling
6441 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6443 \begin_inset space ~
6446 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6451 environment has the same left margin.
6452 \begin_inset Newline newline
6455 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6458 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6460 \begin_inset space ~
6465 dialog (toolbar button
6468 arg "layout-paragraph"
6475 \begin_inset space ~
6480 determines the default label width.
6481 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6490 multiple times instead.
6491 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6501 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6504 \begin_inset space ~
6509 every time you alter a label in a
6514 \begin_inset Newline newline
6517 The predefined default width is the length of
6518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6526 \begin_inset space ~
6532 \begin_layout Standard
6537 list the same way as the
6541 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6547 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6551 \begin_layout Standard
6556 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6557 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6559 \begin_inset space ~
6563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6565 reference "sec:Nesting"
6569 to learn about nesting.
6572 \begin_layout Standard
6573 There is yet another feature of the
6577 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6578 left-justifies the item labels by
6580 You can use additional
6584 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6585 justifies the item label.
6590 are documented in section
6591 \begin_inset space ~
6595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6597 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6602 Here are some examples:
6605 \begin_layout Labeling
6606 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6607 Left The default for
6614 \begin_layout Labeling
6615 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6616 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6623 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6626 \begin_layout Labeling
6627 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6628 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6632 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6639 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6642 \begin_layout Subsection
6644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6646 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6651 \begin_inset Index idx
6654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6663 \begin_layout Standard
6664 The features described in this section require that the module
6666 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6668 is loaded in the document settings.
6669 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6675 \begin_inset Index idx
6678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6688 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6689 Custom Enumerate Lists
6690 \begin_inset Index idx
6693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6694 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6702 \begin_layout Standard
6704 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6707 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6710 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6711 There you add the command
6714 \begin_layout Standard
6722 \begin_layout Standard
6734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6735 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6736 Code, look at section
6737 \begin_inset space ~
6741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6743 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6756 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6763 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6764 For capital Roman numerals replace
6776 in the command above.
6777 For Arabic numerals use
6785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6792 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6807 \begin_layout Standard
6809 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6817 You can only number 26
6818 \begin_inset space ~
6821 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6829 \begin_layout Standard
6830 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6831 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6834 \begin_layout Standard
6835 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6838 \begin_layout Enumerate
6839 \begin_inset Argument 1
6842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6868 \begin_layout Enumerate
6869 \begin_inset Argument 1
6872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6895 \begin_layout Enumerate
6900 \begin_layout Enumerate
6901 \begin_inset Argument 1
6904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6928 \begin_layout Enumerate
6929 \begin_inset Argument 1
6932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6958 \begin_layout Standard
6959 For this list these commands were used:
6962 \begin_layout Standard
6973 \begin_inset Newline newline
6981 \begin_inset Newline newline
6989 \begin_inset Newline newline
6999 \begin_layout Standard
7006 makes the label emphasized and
7015 \begin_layout Standard
7016 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7024 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7025 lists until you change the definition.
7033 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7035 \begin_inset Index idx
7038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7039 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7047 \begin_layout Standard
7048 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7051 \begin_layout Enumerate
7052 \begin_inset Argument 1
7055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7074 \begin_inset Note Note
7077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7078 goes back to default numbering
7086 \begin_layout Enumerate
7090 \begin_layout Standard
7094 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7098 \begin_layout Standard
7099 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7104 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7105 to indicate that it is a resumed
7106 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7107 , but in the output.
7110 \begin_layout Standard
7111 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7119 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7128 \begin_layout Standard
7129 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7131 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7132 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7133 of a normal enumeration.
7134 There, insert the command
7137 \begin_layout Standard
7143 \begin_layout Standard
7148 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7152 \begin_layout Enumerate
7156 \begin_layout Enumerate
7160 \begin_layout Standard
7161 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7164 \begin_layout Enumerate
7165 \begin_inset Argument 1
7168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7184 This enumeration starts at 4
7187 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7189 \begin_inset Index idx
7192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7201 \begin_layout Standard
7202 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7204 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7207 \begin_layout Itemize
7211 \begin_layout Itemize
7212 with standard spacing
7215 \begin_layout Standard
7216 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7218 Add there the command
7222 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7225 \begin_layout Itemize
7226 \begin_inset Argument 1
7229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7248 \begin_layout Itemize
7252 \begin_layout Itemize
7256 \begin_layout Standard
7257 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7264 \begin_inset Index idx
7267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7275 For more information see its documentation,
7276 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7286 \begin_layout Standard
7287 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7289 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7290 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7294 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7297 \begin_layout Enumerate
7298 \begin_inset Argument 1
7301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7309 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7322 \begin_layout Enumerate
7323 with negative indentation
7326 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7327 Further Customization
7328 \begin_inset Index idx
7331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7332 Lists ! Customization
7340 \begin_layout Standard
7341 You can also change the style of description lists.
7345 \begin_layout Standard
7351 \begin_layout Standard
7352 changes the description label font, the command
7355 \begin_layout Standard
7361 \begin_layout Standard
7362 sets the list style.
7365 \begin_layout Standard
7366 An example where the command
7369 \begin_layout Standard
7374 itshape, style=nextline
7377 \begin_layout Standard
7381 \begin_layout Description
7383 \begin_inset space ~
7387 \begin_inset Argument 1
7390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7396 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7398 itshape, style=nextline
7408 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7409 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7413 \begin_layout Description
7415 \begin_inset space ~
7418 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7419 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7420 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7423 \begin_layout Standard
7424 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7430 \begin_inset Index idx
7433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7441 For more information see its documentation
7442 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7452 \begin_layout Subsection
7454 \begin_inset Index idx
7457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7466 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7468 \begin_inset space ~
7471 Address: An Overview
7474 \begin_layout Standard
7475 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7476 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7484 \begin_inset space ~
7490 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7491 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7492 gags on the document.
7493 In contrast, you can use the
7500 \begin_inset space ~
7505 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7506 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7510 \begin_layout Standard
7511 Of course, you're not limited to using
7518 \begin_inset space ~
7527 \begin_inset space ~
7532 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7533 some European academic papers.
7536 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7538 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7540 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7547 \begin_layout Standard
7552 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7553 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7557 \begin_inset space ~
7562 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7563 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7564 Here's an example of each:
7567 \begin_layout Right Address
7569 \begin_inset Newline newline
7573 \begin_inset Newline newline
7577 \begin_inset Newline newline
7580 When is it? What is today?
7583 \begin_layout Standard
7587 \begin_inset space ~
7593 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7595 the largest block of text on a single line.
7596 Here's an example of the
7603 \begin_layout Address
7605 \begin_inset Newline newline
7608 Where do I send this
7609 \begin_inset Newline newline
7612 Your post office and country
7615 \begin_layout Standard
7616 As you can see, both
7623 \begin_inset space ~
7628 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7633 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7634 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7640 This makes sense, since
7648 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7649 Thus, you have to use
7656 arg "newline-insert newline"
7661 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7662 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7664 \begin_inset space ~
7668 \begin_inset space ~
7673 ) to start a new line in an
7680 \begin_inset space ~
7688 \begin_layout Subsection
7692 \begin_layout Standard
7693 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7694 or list of references.
7696 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7699 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7701 \begin_inset Index idx
7704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7713 \begin_layout Standard
7718 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7719 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7720 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7721 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7735 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7736 The book document classes ignores the
7740 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7744 in a letter document class.
7747 \begin_layout Standard
7752 environment does several things for you.
7753 First, it puts the centered label
7754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7762 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7764 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7765 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7766 the subsequent text.
7767 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7769 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7773 \begin_layout Standard
7774 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7778 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7779 The new paragraph will still be in the
7784 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7785 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7788 \begin_layout Standard
7789 \begin_inset Float figure
7794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7796 \begin_inset Graphics
7797 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7805 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7808 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7810 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7831 \begin_layout Standard
7832 We would love to demonstrate the
7836 environment, but since this document is in the
7837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7844 class, we can't do this.
7845 We inserted it therefore as figure
7846 \begin_inset space ~
7850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7852 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7857 If you have never heard of an
7858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7865 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7868 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7870 \begin_inset Index idx
7873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7882 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7889 \begin_layout Standard
7894 environment is used to list references.
7895 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7896 only use it at the end of the document.
7908 \begin_layout Standard
7909 When you first open a
7913 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7914 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7930 depending on the document class.
7931 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7932 Each paragraph of the
7936 environment is a bibliography entry.
7941 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7942 Each new paragraph is still in the
7949 \begin_layout Standard
7950 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7951 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7953 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7955 handling, have a look at section
7956 \begin_inset space ~
7960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7962 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7969 \begin_layout Subsection
7970 Special Environments
7973 \begin_layout Standard
7975 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7976 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7979 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7984 \begin_inset Index idx
7987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7995 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7997 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8004 \begin_layout Standard
8010 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8012 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8017 key as a fixed whitespace.
8021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8034 \begin_inset space ~
8039 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8057 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8060 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8063 arg "newline-insert newline"
8080 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8081 So, when you finish using the
8086 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8087 Also, you can nest the
8092 environment inside of others.
8095 \begin_layout Standard
8096 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8099 \begin_layout Itemize
8103 arg "newline-insert newline"
8106 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8107 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8111 \begin_inset space \space{}
8121 arg "newline-insert newline"
8127 \begin_layout Itemize
8131 arg "newline-insert newline"
8141 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8147 \begin_layout Itemize
8148 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8149 You must put at least one
8153 in any line you want blank.
8154 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8158 \begin_layout Itemize
8159 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8163 since that will insert
8168 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8171 arg "self-insert \""
8177 \begin_layout Standard
8181 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8185 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8189 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8193 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8197 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8198 printf("Hello World!
8203 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8207 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8211 \begin_layout Standard
8212 This is just the standard
8213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8224 \begin_layout Standard
8230 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8232 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8233 as if you used a typewriter.
8234 \begin_inset Index idx
8237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8238 Paragraph environments|)
8243 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8246 Program Code Listings
8251 \begin_inset space ~
8259 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8263 \begin_inset Index idx
8266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8275 \begin_layout Standard
8280 environment is similar to the
8285 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8286 computer console text.
8291 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8305 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8306 you can have empty lines.
8319 \begin_layout Itemize
8320 have a certain language and a text style
8323 \begin_layout Itemize
8324 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8325 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8326 and \SpecialChar TeX
8330 \begin_layout Standard
8331 Because of these properties
8335 works like a typewriter.
8339 \begin_layout Verbatim
8344 \begin_layout Verbatim
8348 The following 2 lines are empty:
8351 \begin_layout Verbatim
8355 \begin_layout Verbatim
8359 \begin_layout Verbatim
8361 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8366 \begin_layout Standard
8371 environment is identical to
8375 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8376 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8383 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8388 \begin_layout Section
8389 Nesting Environments
8390 \begin_inset Index idx
8393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8394 Nesting ! Environments
8400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8409 \begin_layout Subsection
8413 \begin_layout Standard
8415 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8417 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8419 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8421 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8433 \begin_layout Enumerate
8437 \begin_layout Enumerate
8442 \begin_layout Enumerate
8446 \begin_layout Enumerate
8451 \begin_layout Enumerate
8455 \begin_layout Standard
8456 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8457 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8459 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8461 \begin_inset space ~
8465 \begin_inset space ~
8473 \begin_inset space ~
8477 \begin_inset space ~
8482 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8484 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8487 arg "depth-increment"
8493 arg "depth-decrement"
8507 arg "depth-increment"
8513 arg "depth-decrement"
8517 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8518 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8522 \begin_layout Standard
8523 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8524 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8525 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8526 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8527 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8530 \begin_layout Standard
8531 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8533 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8535 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8538 \begin_layout Subsection
8539 What You Can and Can't Nest
8542 \begin_layout Standard
8543 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8544 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8547 \begin_layout Standard
8548 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8549 than a simple yes or no.
8550 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8553 \begin_layout Itemize
8554 Completely unnestable
8557 \begin_layout Itemize
8558 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8562 \begin_layout Itemize
8563 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8567 \begin_layout Standard
8568 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8569 environments have them:
8572 \begin_layout Description
8573 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8574 Can't nest into them.
8578 \begin_layout Itemize
8584 \begin_layout Itemize
8590 \begin_layout Itemize
8596 \begin_layout Itemize
8602 \begin_layout Itemize
8609 \begin_layout Description
8611 \begin_inset space ~
8614 Nestable You can nest them.
8615 You can nest other things into them.
8619 \begin_layout Itemize
8625 \begin_layout Itemize
8631 \begin_layout Itemize
8637 \begin_layout Itemize
8643 \begin_layout Itemize
8649 \begin_layout Itemize
8655 \begin_layout Itemize
8661 \begin_layout Itemize
8668 \begin_layout Itemize
8674 \begin_layout Itemize
8681 \begin_layout Description
8682 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8683 You can't nest anything into them.
8687 \begin_layout Itemize
8693 \begin_layout Itemize
8699 \begin_layout Itemize
8705 \begin_layout Itemize
8711 \begin_layout Itemize
8717 \begin_layout Itemize
8723 \begin_layout Itemize
8729 \begin_layout Itemize
8735 \begin_layout Itemize
8741 \begin_layout Itemize
8747 \begin_layout Itemize
8753 \begin_layout Itemize
8759 \begin_layout Itemize
8765 \begin_layout Itemize
8769 \begin_inset space ~
8775 \begin_layout Itemize
8782 \begin_layout Standard
8783 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8791 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8801 \begin_inset space ~
8804 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8805 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8806 nested section headings violate this.
8814 \begin_layout Subsection
8815 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8816 \begin_inset Index idx
8819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8820 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8828 \begin_layout Standard
8829 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8830 affected by nesting anyhow.
8834 \begin_layout Itemize
8838 \begin_layout Itemize
8842 \begin_layout Itemize
8846 \begin_layout Standard
8848 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8856 Figures and tables in
8860 are not affected by this.
8865 Have a look at section
8866 \begin_inset space ~
8870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8872 reference "sec:Floats"
8876 for more information about
8883 \begin_layout Standard
8885 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8886 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8890 \begin_layout Standard
8891 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8899 of its own, it behaves just like a
8900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8907 paragraph environment.
8908 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8912 \begin_layout Standard
8913 Here's an example with a table:
8916 \begin_layout Enumerate
8921 \begin_layout Enumerate
8922 This is (a) and it's nested.
8926 \begin_layout Standard
8927 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8933 \begin_layout Standard
8935 \begin_inset Tabular
8936 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8937 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8938 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8939 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9023 \begin_layout Standard
9024 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9031 \begin_layout Enumerate
9033 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9037 \begin_layout Enumerate
9041 \begin_layout Standard
9042 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9045 \begin_layout Enumerate
9050 \begin_layout Enumerate
9051 This is (a) and it's nested.
9055 \begin_layout Standard
9056 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9062 \begin_layout Standard
9064 \begin_inset Tabular
9065 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9066 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9067 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9068 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9152 \begin_layout Standard
9153 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9159 \begin_layout Enumerate
9166 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9169 \begin_layout Enumerate
9173 \begin_layout Standard
9174 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9178 \begin_layout Standard
9179 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9182 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9185 \begin_layout Enumerate
9190 \begin_layout Enumerate
9191 This is (a) and it's nested.
9194 \begin_layout Standard
9195 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9201 \begin_layout Standard
9203 \begin_inset Tabular
9204 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9205 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9206 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9207 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9292 \begin_layout Standard
9293 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9299 \begin_layout Enumerate
9301 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9308 \begin_layout Enumerate
9312 \begin_layout Standard
9313 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9319 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9320 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9324 \begin_layout Subsection
9325 Usage and General Features
9328 \begin_layout Standard
9329 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9330 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9339 is the innermost possible depth.
9340 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9343 \begin_layout Enumerate
9344 level #1 – outermost
9348 \begin_layout Enumerate
9353 \begin_layout Enumerate
9358 \begin_layout Enumerate
9363 \begin_layout Itemize
9368 \begin_layout Itemize
9377 \begin_layout Standard
9378 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9379 both of them in the example.
9380 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9390 For example, if we tried to nest another
9395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9402 , we would get errors.
9405 \begin_layout Subsection
9407 \begin_inset Index idx
9410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9419 \begin_layout Standard
9420 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9421 We have several examples of nested environments.
9422 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9426 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9427 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9430 \begin_layout Labeling
9431 \labelwidthstring MMM
9432 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9441 \begin_layout Labeling
9442 \labelwidthstring MMM
9443 #2-a This is level #2.
9444 We created it by using
9447 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9453 arg "depth-increment"
9460 \begin_layout Labeling
9461 \labelwidthstring MMM
9462 #3-a This is level #3.
9463 This time, we just enter
9470 arg "depth-increment"
9474 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9478 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9484 arg "depth-increment"
9491 \begin_layout Standard
9496 environment, nested inside of
9497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9505 So, it's at level #4.
9506 We did this by entering
9509 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9515 arg "depth-increment"
9518 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9523 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9539 \begin_layout Standard
9544 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9547 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9553 \begin_layout Labeling
9554 \labelwidthstring MMM
9555 #4-a This is level #4.
9559 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9562 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9567 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9571 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9576 keep nesting things inside
9577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9588 \begin_layout Labeling
9589 \labelwidthstring MMM
9590 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9595 \begin_layout Labeling
9596 \labelwidthstring MMM
9597 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9598 and this is level #6.
9599 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9603 \begin_layout Labeling
9604 \labelwidthstring MMM
9605 #5-b Back to level #5.
9609 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9615 arg "depth-decrement"
9622 \begin_layout Labeling
9623 \labelwidthstring MMM
9627 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9633 arg "depth-decrement"
9636 , we're back at level #4.
9640 \begin_layout Labeling
9641 \labelwidthstring MMM
9642 #3-b Back to level #3.
9643 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9647 \begin_layout Labeling
9648 \labelwidthstring MMM
9649 #2-b Back to level #2.
9654 \begin_layout Labeling
9655 \labelwidthstring MMM
9656 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9657 After this sentence, we will enter
9661 and change the paragraph environment back to
9668 \begin_layout Standard
9669 We could have also used the
9685 environment in place of the
9690 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9693 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9694 Example 2: Inheritance
9697 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9698 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9701 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9710 arg "depth-increment"
9714 \begin_inset Newline newline
9717 which, we will change to the
9725 \begin_layout Enumerate
9730 environment, at level #2.
9733 \begin_layout Enumerate
9734 Notice how the nested
9738 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9742 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9746 \begin_layout Standard
9747 We ended this example by entering
9752 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9756 and reset the nesting depth by using
9759 arg "depth-decrement"
9765 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9766 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9775 \begin_inset Argument 1
9778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9779 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9787 \begin_layout Enumerate
9788 This is level #1, in an
9792 paragraph environment.
9793 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9797 \begin_layout Enumerate
9802 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9808 arg "depth-increment"
9812 Now, what happens if we nest an
9816 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9817 label be? An asterisk?
9821 \begin_layout Itemize
9831 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9832 So, its label is a bullet.
9833 (We got here by using
9836 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9842 arg "depth-increment"
9845 , then changing the environment to
9853 \begin_layout Itemize
9854 Here's level #4, produced using
9857 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9863 arg "depth-increment"
9867 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9872 \begin_layout Enumerate
9875 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9880 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9884 , because we are in the
9892 environment (that is, it is an
9907 \begin_layout Enumerate
9912 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9913 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9917 \begin_layout Enumerate
9918 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9921 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9924 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9927 \begin_layout Enumerate
9931 arg "depth-decrement"
9934 to decrease the depth after the next
9937 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9944 \begin_layout Enumerate
9946 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9951 \begin_layout Enumerate
9953 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9954 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9958 \begin_layout Enumerate
9959 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9968 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9973 reset the counter for the label.
9977 \begin_layout Enumerate
9981 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9987 arg "depth-decrement"
9990 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9991 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9992 into the twofold-nested
10000 \begin_layout Enumerate
10001 The same thing happens if we do another
10004 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10010 arg "depth-decrement"
10013 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10016 \begin_layout Standard
10017 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10022 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10033 The number of other
10037 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10044 The same rule applies for the
10048 environment, as well.
10051 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10052 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10055 \begin_layout Enumerate
10056 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10057 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10058 the same detail with how we did it.
10067 \begin_layout Standard
10075 arg "depth-increment"
10082 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10083 the example in parentheses someplace.
10084 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10085 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10086 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10090 \begin_layout Enumerate
10095 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10099 \begin_layout Verse
10100 Now we will add verse.
10101 \begin_inset Newline newline
10104 It will get much worse.
10105 \begin_inset Newline newline
10115 arg "depth-increment"
10125 \begin_layout Verse
10126 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10127 \begin_inset Newline newline
10130 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10131 \begin_inset Newline newline
10137 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10145 \begin_layout Verse
10146 Here comes a table:
10150 \begin_layout Standard
10151 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10157 \begin_layout Standard
10159 \begin_inset Tabular
10160 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10161 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10162 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10163 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10248 \begin_layout Verse
10252 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10262 arg "depth-increment"
10268 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10274 \begin_inset Newline newline
10282 arg "depth-decrement"
10289 \begin_layout Enumerate
10294 : level #1) This is another item.
10295 Note that selecting a
10299 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10300 3 times to put the table inside the
10308 \begin_layout Quotation
10309 We're now ending the
10313 list and changing to
10318 We're still at level #1.
10319 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10320 The next set of paragraphs is a
10321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10328 We will nest both the
10335 \begin_inset space ~
10340 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10344 for the letter body.
10348 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10351 to preserve the depth.
10352 Remember that you need to use
10355 arg "newline-insert newline"
10358 to create multiple lines inside the
10365 \begin_inset space ~
10375 \begin_layout Right Address
10377 \begin_inset Newline newline
10380 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10381 \begin_inset Newline newline
10387 \begin_layout Address
10389 \begin_inset space ~
10395 \begin_layout Quotation
10396 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10397 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10400 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10401 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10402 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10403 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10404 as soon as possible.
10405 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10408 \begin_layout Quotation
10409 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10410 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10411 with your order, along with payment.
10414 \begin_layout Quotation
10415 We thank you again for your patience.
10418 \begin_layout Address
10420 \begin_inset Newline newline
10427 \begin_layout Quotation
10428 That ends that example!
10431 \begin_layout Standard
10432 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10433 gives you a lot of power with just
10435 We could have easily nested an
10456 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10459 \begin_layout Subsection
10461 \begin_inset Index idx
10464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10465 Nesting ! Separation
10471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10473 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10480 \begin_layout Standard
10481 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10483 For example you need two different enumerations:
10486 \begin_layout Enumerate
10491 \begin_layout Enumerate
10496 \begin_layout Enumerate
10500 \begin_layout Standard
10501 \begin_inset Separator plain
10507 \begin_layout Itemize
10513 \begin_layout Standard
10514 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10520 \begin_layout Enumerate
10524 \begin_layout Enumerate
10528 \begin_layout Enumerate
10532 \begin_layout Standard
10533 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10534 list item and use the menu
10536 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10537 Separated <Name> Above
10541 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10542 Separated <Name> Below
10545 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10546 ) and before or behind it the
10548 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10551 \begin_layout Standard
10552 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10553 (red arrow in LyX).
10554 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10555 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10558 \begin_layout Standard
10559 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10562 arg "paragraph-break"
10569 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10572 \begin_layout Section
10573 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10574 \begin_inset Index idx
10577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10586 \begin_layout Standard
10587 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10588 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10590 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10591 be broken at the end of a line.
10592 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10596 \begin_layout Subsection
10598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10600 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10605 \begin_inset Index idx
10608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10617 \begin_layout Standard
10618 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10619 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10620 ) not to break the line at
10622 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10625 \begin_layout Quote
10626 Further documentation is given in section
10627 \begin_inset Newline newline
10631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10633 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10641 \begin_layout Standard
10642 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10657 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10666 A protected space is set with
10668 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10669 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10671 \begin_inset space ~
10679 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10685 \begin_layout Subsection
10687 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10689 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10694 \begin_inset Index idx
10697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10698 Spacing ! Horizontal
10706 \begin_layout Standard
10707 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10709 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10710 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10714 The length units are listed in Appendix
10715 \begin_inset space ~
10719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10721 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10732 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10737 \begin_inset Index idx
10740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10741 Spaces ! Inter-word
10749 \begin_layout Standard
10750 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10751 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10752 at the ends of sentences.
10753 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10754 automatically takes care about this.
10755 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10756 followed by a period; see section
10757 \begin_inset space ~
10761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10763 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10768 To insert a normal space, select
10770 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10771 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10773 \begin_inset space ~
10781 arg "space-insert normal"
10787 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10789 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10791 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10796 \begin_inset Index idx
10799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10808 \begin_layout Standard
10810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10817 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10826 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10827 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10828 inside abbreviations:
10831 \begin_layout Quote
10833 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10837 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10840 \begin_layout Standard
10841 or between values and units.
10842 Compare for example this:
10843 \begin_inset Newline newline
10847 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10851 \begin_inset Newline newline
10854 10 kg (normal space
10857 \begin_layout Standard
10858 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10860 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10861 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10863 \begin_inset space ~
10871 arg "space-insert thin"
10877 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10881 \begin_layout Standard
10882 You can also insert the following space types:
10885 \begin_layout Description
10887 \begin_inset space ~
10891 \begin_inset space ~
10894 space A line with a
10895 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10899 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10903 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10906 negative thin space between the arrows.
10909 \begin_layout Description
10911 \begin_inset space ~
10915 \begin_inset space ~
10918 space A line with a
10919 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10923 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10927 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10930 negative medium space between the arrows.
10933 \begin_layout Description
10935 \begin_inset space ~
10939 \begin_inset space ~
10942 space A line with a
10943 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10947 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10951 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10954 negative thick space between the arrows.
10957 \begin_layout Description
10959 \begin_inset space ~
10963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10967 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10971 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10975 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10979 \begin_inset space ~
10983 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10986 em) space between the arrows.
10989 \begin_layout Description
10991 \begin_inset space ~
10995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10999 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11003 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11007 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11011 \begin_inset space ~
11015 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11018 em) space between the arrows.
11021 \begin_layout Description
11023 \begin_inset space ~
11027 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11031 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11035 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11039 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11043 \begin_inset space ~
11047 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11050 em) space between the arrows.
11053 \begin_layout Description
11055 \begin_inset space ~
11059 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11063 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11068 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11072 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11075 cm space between the arrows.
11078 \begin_layout Standard
11080 \begin_inset space ~
11084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11086 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11090 lists the different space sizes.
11093 \begin_layout Standard
11094 \begin_inset Float table
11099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11100 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11103 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11105 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11109 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11119 \begin_inset Tabular
11120 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11121 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11122 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11123 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11187 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11239 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11243 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11319 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11334 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11347 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11375 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11398 \begin_inset Index idx
11401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11410 \begin_layout Standard
11411 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11412 feature for adding extra space
11413 in a uniform fashion.
11414 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11415 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11416 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11417 equally between themselves.
11420 \begin_layout Standard
11421 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11424 \begin_layout Quote
11426 This is on the left side
11427 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11430 This is on the right
11433 \begin_layout Quote
11436 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11440 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11446 \begin_layout Quote
11449 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11453 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11457 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11463 \begin_layout Standard
11464 That was an example in the
11470 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11474 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11478 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11481 is one in a standard paragraph.
11482 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11486 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11489 \begin_layout Standard
11490 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11493 \begin_inset space ~
11498 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11501 \begin_layout Standard
11503 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11507 \begin_inset space ~
11513 \begin_layout Standard
11515 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11519 \begin_inset space ~
11525 \begin_layout Standard
11527 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11531 \begin_inset space ~
11537 \begin_layout Standard
11539 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11543 \begin_inset space ~
11549 \begin_layout Standard
11551 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11555 \begin_inset space ~
11561 \begin_layout Standard
11563 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11567 \begin_inset space ~
11573 \begin_layout Standard
11574 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11582 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11586 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11588 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11589 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11593 option in the space dialog.
11601 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11603 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11605 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11610 \begin_inset Index idx
11613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11622 \begin_layout Standard
11623 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11624 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11627 \begin_layout Standard
11628 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11631 What is correct English?:
11632 \begin_inset Newline newline
11636 \begin_inset Newline newline
11640 \begin_inset space ~
11643 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11644 \begin_inset Newline newline
11648 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11659 \begin_inset Newline newline
11663 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11674 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11680 \begin_layout Standard
11682 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11687 \begin_inset space ~
11691 \begin_inset space ~
11695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11699 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11701 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11702 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11706 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11712 \begin_inset space ~
11716 \begin_inset space ~
11720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11723 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11732 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11733 That is why it is named
11734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11742 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11743 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11747 \begin_layout Subsection
11749 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11751 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11756 \begin_inset Index idx
11759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11768 \begin_layout Standard
11769 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11771 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11772 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11774 \begin_inset space ~
11780 There you find the following sizes:
11783 \begin_layout Standard
11796 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11797 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11802 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11804 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11805 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11807 \begin_inset space ~
11813 \begin_inset Index idx
11816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11817 Document ! Settings
11822 for the paragraph separation.
11823 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11834 \begin_layout Standard
11840 \begin_inset Index idx
11843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11849 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11850 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11855 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11856 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11865 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11874 s are described in section
11875 \begin_inset space ~
11879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11881 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11890 If there are several
11894 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11895 You can therefore use
11899 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11902 \begin_layout Standard
11907 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11908 \begin_inset space ~
11912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11914 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11921 \begin_layout Standard
11922 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11932 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11933 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11945 \begin_layout Subsection
11946 Paragraph Alignment
11947 \begin_inset Index idx
11950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11951 Paragraph ! Alignment
11959 \begin_layout Standard
11960 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11962 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11965 dialog (toolbar button
11968 arg "layout-paragraph"
11972 There are five possibilities:
11975 \begin_layout Itemize
11983 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11989 \begin_layout Itemize
11997 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12003 \begin_layout Itemize
12011 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12017 \begin_layout Itemize
12025 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12031 \begin_layout Itemize
12039 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12045 \begin_layout Standard
12046 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12047 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12048 the left and right margins.
12049 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12052 \begin_layout Standard
12054 This paragraph is right aligned,
12057 \begin_layout Standard
12059 this one is centered,
12062 \begin_layout Standard
12064 this one is left aligned.
12067 \begin_layout Subsection
12069 \begin_inset Index idx
12072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12073 Page breaks ! Forced
12079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12081 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12088 \begin_layout Standard
12089 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12090 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12091 force a page break where you want one.
12092 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12093 is good at page breaking.
12094 Only if you use a lot of
12098 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12099 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12102 \begin_layout Standard
12103 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12104 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12108 have to change the page breaking.
12111 \begin_layout Standard
12112 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12114 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12116 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12117 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12119 \begin_inset space ~
12125 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12127 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12128 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12130 \begin_inset space ~
12135 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12137 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12138 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12141 \begin_layout Standard
12142 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12143 at the top of a page.
12144 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12146 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12147 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12148 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12152 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12156 to learn more about
12163 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12165 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12167 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12172 \begin_inset Index idx
12175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12176 Page breaks ! Clear
12184 \begin_layout Standard
12185 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12186 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12187 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12188 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12189 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12192 \begin_layout Standard
12193 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12195 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12196 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12198 \begin_inset space ~
12204 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12206 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12207 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12209 \begin_inset space ~
12213 \begin_inset space ~
12218 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12219 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12222 \begin_layout Subsection
12224 \begin_inset Index idx
12227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12234 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12236 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12243 \begin_layout Standard
12244 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12246 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12248 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12249 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12251 \begin_inset space ~
12255 \begin_inset space ~
12263 arg "newline-insert newline"
12267 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12269 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12270 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12272 \begin_inset space ~
12276 \begin_inset space ~
12284 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12287 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12289 This is useful to avoid
12290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12297 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12300 \begin_layout Standard
12301 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12302 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12304 very good at line breaking.
12305 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12306 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12307 \begin_inset space ~
12311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12313 reference "sec:Quote"
12318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12320 reference "sec:Verse"
12325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12327 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12334 \begin_layout Subsection
12336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12338 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12343 \begin_inset Index idx
12346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12355 \begin_layout Standard
12357 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12368 \begin_layout Standard
12372 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12373 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12375 \begin_inset space ~
12380 you can insert horizontal lines.
12381 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12382 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12383 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12386 \begin_layout Standard
12388 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12399 \begin_layout Section
12400 Characters and Symbols
12403 \begin_layout Standard
12404 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12405 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12406 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12414 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12418 for information on how this is done.
12421 \begin_layout Standard
12422 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12427 dialog via the menu
12429 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12430 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12436 \begin_layout Standard
12437 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12445 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12446 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12448 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12456 \begin_layout Section
12457 Fonts and Text Styles
12458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12460 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12467 \begin_layout Subsection
12469 \begin_inset Index idx
12472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12481 \begin_layout Standard
12482 There are two types of fonts:
12485 \begin_layout Description
12487 \begin_inset space ~
12491 \begin_inset Index idx
12494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12500 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12501 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12505 characters) in the font.
12506 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12507 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12508 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12509 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12510 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12511 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12512 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12513 \begin_inset Newline newline
12516 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12517 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12518 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12519 sizes than at small ones.
12520 \begin_inset Newline newline
12534 \begin_inset space ~
12542 \begin_layout Description
12544 \begin_inset space ~
12548 \begin_inset Index idx
12551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12557 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12558 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12559 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12560 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12561 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12562 image manipulation program.
12563 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12564 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12565 \begin_inset space ~
12568 pixels high up to 34
12569 \begin_inset space ~
12572 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12573 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12574 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12576 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12577 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12578 \begin_inset Newline newline
12581 Bitmap fonts are named
12584 \begin_inset space ~
12589 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12592 \begin_layout Standard
12593 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12594 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12595 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12596 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12597 use scalable fonts.
12600 \begin_layout Standard
12601 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12604 \begin_layout Standard
12605 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12606 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12607 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12608 font to emphasize text, you use an
12609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12617 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12619 In \SpecialChar LyX
12620 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12624 \begin_layout Subsection
12627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12629 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12636 \begin_layout Standard
12637 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12638 used its own fonts.
12639 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12640 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12643 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12644 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12645 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12646 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12647 to a word processor.
12648 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12649 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12650 files are very portable across
12651 different machines.
12652 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12653 has increased a lot
12654 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12657 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12659 \begin_inset space ~
12663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12665 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12670 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12671 code in the document
12672 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12675 \begin_layout Standard
12676 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12677 engines that are also able directly
12678 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12680 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12682 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12684 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12685 that is installed on your system.
12686 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12689 \begin_layout Standard
12690 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12698 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12699 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12707 \begin_layout Subsection
12708 Document Font and Font size
12709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12711 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12716 \begin_inset Index idx
12719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12726 \begin_inset Index idx
12729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12738 \begin_layout Standard
12739 You can set the document fonts in the
12741 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12745 \begin_inset Index idx
12748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12749 Document ! Settings
12759 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12760 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12763 \begin_inset space ~
12772 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12774 \begin_inset space ~
12777 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12780 \begin_layout Standard
12785 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12786 This requires that you use
12798 as the output format, i.
12799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12803 \begin_inset space \space{}
12806 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12807 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12808 installed (see section
12809 \begin_inset space ~
12813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12815 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12820 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12822 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12823 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12825 \begin_inset space ~
12828 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12829 cannot determine the family.
12830 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12831 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12834 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12837 \begin_layout Standard
12838 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12839 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12844 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12850 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12852 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
12854 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
12857 font encoding, this is
12858 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
12859 , depending on the document language,
12862 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
12863 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12871 \begin_inset space ~
12877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12887 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
12888 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12896 \begin_inset space ~
12902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12910 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
12914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12931 European Computer Modern
12934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12942 However, some classes set different default fonts.
12945 \begin_layout Standard
12950 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
12951 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12956 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
12959 \begin_inset space ~
12964 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12970 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12971 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12974 \begin_layout Itemize
12978 \begin_inset space ~
12983 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12996 \begin_inset space ~
13001 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13002 community in order to replace
13006 as the default font.
13007 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13008 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13011 \begin_inset space ~
13024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13025 One difference is improved kerning.
13033 \begin_layout Itemize
13034 If you do not like the look of
13042 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13043 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13047 \begin_inset space ~
13053 \begin_inset space ~
13063 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13064 \begin_inset space ~
13067 serif and typewriter fonts,
13071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13072 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13079 \begin_inset space ~
13088 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13089 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13093 \begin_inset space \space{}
13101 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13105 \begin_inset space \space{}
13111 \begin_inset space ~
13119 \begin_inset space ~
13129 but you can also select your own.
13130 \begin_inset Newline newline
13133 The differences between roman,
13136 \begin_inset space ~
13145 fonts are explained in section
13146 \begin_inset space ~
13150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13152 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13157 \begin_inset Newline newline
13163 \begin_inset space ~
13168 was originally designed for newspapers.
13169 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13170 into the small newspaper columns.
13174 \begin_inset space ~
13179 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13182 \begin_layout Standard
13183 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13196 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13201 depends on the class you are using.
13202 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13205 \begin_layout Standard
13206 Note that the font size is the
13211 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13212 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13213 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13214 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13217 \begin_inset space ~
13223 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13224 \begin_inset space ~
13228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13230 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13237 \begin_layout Standard
13241 \begin_inset space ~
13246 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13248 \begin_inset space ~
13251 serif or typewriter.
13256 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13266 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13269 \begin_layout Standard
13274 LaTeX font encoding
13276 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13277 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13283 \begin_inset Index idx
13286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13294 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13296 \begin_inset space ~
13300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13302 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13309 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13310 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13311 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13315 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13323 \begin_layout Standard
13324 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13326 Use Old Style Figures
13330 Use True Small Caps
13333 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13336 Use Old Style Figures
13338 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13340 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13341 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13345 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13348 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13352 Use True Small Caps
13354 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13355 of scaled capitals.
13356 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13357 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13360 \begin_layout Standard
13365 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13366 a font to display the script characters.
13370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13371 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13377 \begin_inset Index idx
13380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13387 So this has no effect for the document language
13403 \begin_layout Standard
13406 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13408 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13409 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13415 \begin_inset Index idx
13418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13420 packages ! microtype
13429 \begin_layout Standard
13432 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13434 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13439 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13440 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13446 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13447 \begin_inset space ~
13451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13453 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13463 \begin_layout Standard
13464 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13468 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13476 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13481 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13482 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13484 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13486 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13489 dialog, see section
13490 \begin_inset space ~
13494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13496 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13508 \begin_layout Subsection
13512 \begin_layout Standard
13513 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13514 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13516 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13517 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13518 choose a math font in the dialog
13520 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13524 \begin_inset Index idx
13527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13528 Document ! Settings
13534 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13535 automatically selects a math font.
13536 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13537 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13546 \begin_inset space ~
13552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13557 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13558 document font is available.
13561 \begin_layout Standard
13562 Note that the math font will not be used for
13566 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13572 or by the insertion of the command
13579 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13580 \begin_inset space ~
13584 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13585 while the math characters do not.
13587 \begin_inset space ~
13590 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13593 \begin_inset space ~
13601 \begin_inset space ~
13606 in the document font settings.
13609 \begin_layout Standard
13610 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13611 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13612 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13613 font (in most cases
13614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13620 \begin_inset space ~
13626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13629 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13630 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13638 \begin_inset space ~
13644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13650 \begin_layout Subsection
13651 Using Different Character Styles
13652 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
13654 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13656 name "subsec:charstyles"
13663 \begin_inset Index idx
13666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13673 \begin_inset Index idx
13676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13685 \begin_layout Standard
13686 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13687 automatically changes the
13688 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
13691 style for certain paragraph environments.
13693 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601107
13694 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
13696 This is where we meet the concept of
13702 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
13704 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
13708 \begin_layout Standard
13710 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
13714 supports two character styles,
13724 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601215
13730 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13733 e., available with all document classes.
13734 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
13736 custom character styles
13738 for specific purposes.
13739 We describe both types of characters styles in a minute.
13742 \begin_layout Standard
13744 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601474
13745 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
13755 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
13759 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
13760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13772 — you customized the
13777 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
13778 among them, encourage the use of
13790 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
13791 \begin_inset space ~
13795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13797 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13802 Rather than fiddling with
13806 , they encourage the use of
13818 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
13819 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13823 \begin_inset Quotes els
13827 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13830 ), not their form (
13831 \begin_inset Quotes els
13835 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13839 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
13840 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
13841 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
13842 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
13843 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
13844 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
13850 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
13851 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13854 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
13855 With a semantic markup (such as
13859 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
13864 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13866 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
13867 of a document, using different markup semantics.
13870 \begin_layout Standard
13872 \change_inserted -712698321 1525597858
13873 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic character styles that are
13874 provided by \SpecialChar LyX
13880 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13882 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600514
13883 Builtin Character Styles
13884 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13886 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
13893 \begin_layout Standard
13895 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596484
13896 The two builtin character styles can be
13897 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
13901 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
13905 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
13906 both of these styles
13909 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
13917 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
13923 \begin_layout Standard
13928 style, do one of the following:
13931 \begin_layout Itemize
13932 click on the toolbar button
13941 \begin_layout Itemize
13942 use the key binding
13949 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
13953 \begin_layout Itemize
13955 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
13963 arg "dialog-show character"
13969 arg "dialog-show character"
13972 ) as described in section
13973 \begin_inset space ~
13977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13979 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13988 \begin_layout Standard
13989 These commands are all toggles.
13994 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13997 \begin_layout Standard
13998 One typically uses the
14002 style for proper names.
14004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14011 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14017 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14021 \begin_layout Standard
14023 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14028 is producing text in
14032 , but the definition can be changed.
14037 \begin_layout Standard
14038 A more widely used character style is the
14043 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14050 \begin_layout Itemize
14051 clicking on the toolbar button
14060 \begin_layout Itemize
14061 using the keybindings
14068 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14072 \begin_layout Itemize
14074 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14082 arg "dialog-show character"
14088 arg "dialog-show character"
14091 ) as described in section
14092 \begin_inset space ~
14096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14098 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14107 \begin_layout Standard
14112 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14114 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14116 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14119 packages use a different font
14120 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14121 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14127 \begin_layout Standard
14128 We've been using the
14132 style all over the place in this document.
14133 Here's one more example:
14136 \begin_layout Quotation
14139 Do not overuse character styles!
14142 \begin_layout Standard
14143 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14144 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14145 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14146 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
14148 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14152 \begin_layout Standard
14154 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598505
14155 In contrast to the custom character styles, the builtin styles are represented
14156 only as font changes and integrated in the
14164 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14167 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14174 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14176 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14180 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14183 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14185 \begin_inset space ~
14188 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14190 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14196 arg "dialog-show character"
14202 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14204 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14210 arg "dialog-show character"
14214 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14218 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14220 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599406
14221 Custom Character Styles
14222 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14224 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14231 \begin_layout Standard
14233 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598904
14234 Custom character styles can be provided by the document class, a module
14236 \begin_inset space ~
14240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14242 reference "subsec:Modules"
14249 ), or local layout settings (see section
14250 \begin_inset space ~
14254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14256 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14261 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14265 markup for specific functions.
14266 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14271 module that provides, among other things, some custom character styles
14272 to markup linguistic levels:
14281 \begin_inset Quotes els
14285 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14291 \begin_layout Standard
14293 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598951
14294 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14296 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14302 \begin_layout Standard
14304 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599380
14305 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14310 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14311 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14312 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14317 appears as normal font change, the custom character style
14318 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14323 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14331 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14332 This is the way all custom character styles look and feel like.
14333 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14334 \begin_inset Flex Code
14337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14339 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14348 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14353 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14362 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14367 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14376 Note that custom character styles might (as in the example) or might not
14377 emulate on screen their formal appearance.
14382 \begin_layout Subsection
14384 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
14386 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
14390 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
14398 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
14400 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
14404 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14406 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14411 \begin_inset Index idx
14414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14423 \begin_layout Standard
14424 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
14425 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
14428 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
14430 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
14432 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
14436 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
14437 the properties of text passages
14438 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
14442 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14443 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14444 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14445 from ordinary dialog.
14446 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
14450 \begin_layout Standard
14452 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601791
14453 If there are no custom character styles provided by the document class or
14454 a module for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better
14455 way of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly
14456 tweak the properties of the respective text passages.
14461 comes in as a last resort.
14466 \begin_layout Standard
14467 Before we document how to
14468 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
14469 use custom character style
14470 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
14471 tweak the text properties
14473 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
14474 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
14476 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
14480 \begin_inset Newline newline
14483 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14484 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14487 \begin_layout Standard
14489 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
14490 use custom character styles
14491 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
14492 tweak text properties
14495 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
14498 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14500 \begin_inset space ~
14503 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14505 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
14511 arg "dialog-show character"
14516 dialog or press the toolbar button
14519 arg "dialog-show character"
14524 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
14527 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14528 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
14530 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
14533 property that you can choose.
14534 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14537 \begin_inset space ~
14542 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14547 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14548 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14549 environments all at once.
14552 \begin_layout Standard
14554 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
14556 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
14559 properties, and their options (in addition to
14562 \begin_inset space ~
14574 \begin_layout Labeling
14575 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14589 The possible options are:
14593 \begin_layout Labeling
14594 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14599 This is the Roman font family.
14600 Normally a serif font.
14601 It's also the default family.
14611 \begin_layout Labeling
14612 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14616 \begin_inset space ~
14623 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14635 \begin_layout Labeling
14636 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14643 This is the Typewriter font family.
14649 arg "font-typewriter"
14655 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
14659 \begin_layout Standard
14661 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
14662 The general differences of these families are:
14665 \begin_layout Itemize
14667 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
14672 fonts use characters with serifs.
14673 These are the small
14674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14681 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14682 The following example shows the difference:
14683 \begin_inset Newline newline
14687 \begin_inset Newline newline
14692 text without serifs
14695 \begin_inset Newline newline
14698 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14699 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14706 \begin_layout Itemize
14708 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14713 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14714 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14715 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14718 \begin_layout Itemize
14720 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14733 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14751 \begin_inset Newline newline
14755 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14760 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14771 \begin_inset Note Note
14774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14776 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14777 For more on phantoms see section
14778 \begin_inset space ~
14782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14784 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14794 \begin_inset Newline newline
14803 \begin_layout Labeling
14804 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14809 This corresponds to the print weight.
14814 \begin_layout Labeling
14815 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14820 This is the Medium font series.
14821 It's also the default series.
14824 \begin_layout Labeling
14825 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14832 This is the Bold font series.
14845 \begin_layout Labeling
14846 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14851 As the name implies.
14856 \begin_layout Labeling
14857 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14862 This is the Upright font shape.
14863 It's also the default shape.
14866 \begin_layout Labeling
14867 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14877 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
14882 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
14887 s the Italic font shape
14893 \begin_layout Labeling
14894 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14901 This is the Slanted font shape
14903 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14904 , this is different from italic).
14907 \begin_layout Labeling
14908 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14912 \begin_inset space ~
14919 This is the Small caps font shape
14926 \begin_layout Labeling
14927 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14932 Alters the text color.
14933 Note that not all DVI
14934 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
14936 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
14939 viewers are able to display colors.
14941 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
14945 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
14947 \begin_inset space ~
14954 , which means that the document default color set in
14956 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14957 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14963 \begin_inset space ~
14969 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
14971 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
14975 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15055 \begin_inset Index idx
15058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15067 \begin_layout Labeling
15068 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15073 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15074 the language of the document.
15075 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15076 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15077 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15080 in blue to indicate the change
15081 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15082 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15086 \begin_inset Newline newline
15089 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15091 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15092 When using the spell checking (see section
15093 \begin_inset space ~
15097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15099 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15103 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15106 \begin_layout Labeling
15107 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15112 Alters the size of the font.
15114 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15116 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15120 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15123 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15124 document font size.
15125 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15126 the details, but a general description of what
15132 \begin_layout Labeling
15133 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15154 arg "font-size tiny"
15160 \begin_layout Labeling
15161 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15182 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15188 \begin_layout Labeling
15189 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15210 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15216 \begin_layout Labeling
15217 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15238 arg "font-size small"
15244 \begin_layout Labeling
15245 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15259 It's also the default size.
15263 arg "font-size normal"
15269 \begin_layout Labeling
15270 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15291 arg "font-size large"
15297 \begin_layout Labeling
15298 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15319 arg "font-size larger"
15325 \begin_layout Labeling
15326 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15347 arg "font-size largest"
15353 \begin_layout Labeling
15354 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15375 arg "font-size huge"
15381 \begin_layout Labeling
15382 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15403 arg "font-size giant"
15409 \begin_layout Labeling
15410 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15415 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15435 arg "font-size increase"
15441 \begin_layout Labeling
15442 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15447 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15467 arg "font-size decrease"
15474 \begin_layout Standard
15479 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15480 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15482 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15483 — use those instead.
15484 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15487 \begin_layout Labeling
15488 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15490 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
15494 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
15500 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
15501 change a few other things at the character level
15502 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
15503 have text passages being underlined
15507 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
15508 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
15509 days, when you could not change fonts.
15510 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15511 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15512 because some people
15516 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15523 \begin_layout Labeling
15524 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15526 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
15533 This is text with emphasize on
15536 This might seem like the same as
15540 , but it is actually a bit different.
15546 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
15548 Normally this font is equal to italic.
15549 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
15553 \begin_layout Labeling
15554 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15556 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
15561 Don't use underlining.
15566 \begin_layout Labeling
15567 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15569 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
15573 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
15581 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
15583 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
15592 arg "font-underline"
15598 \begin_inset Newline newline
15602 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
15605 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
15606 when you could not change fonts.
15607 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15608 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15609 because some people
15613 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15618 \begin_layout Labeling
15619 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15623 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
15625 \begin_inset space ~
15634 This is text with Double under
15635 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
15637 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
15646 arg "font-underunderline"
15650 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
15652 \begin_inset Newline newline
15655 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
15656 about double underbar
15661 \begin_layout Labeling
15662 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15666 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
15668 \begin_inset space ~
15677 This is text with Wavy under
15678 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
15680 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
15689 arg "font-underwave"
15693 \begin_inset Newline newline
15696 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
15697 Keep antinausea pills handy.
15698 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
15703 \begin_layout Labeling
15704 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15706 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
15711 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
15717 \begin_layout Labeling
15718 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15720 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
15725 Don't use strikethrough.
15728 \begin_layout Labeling
15729 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15733 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
15735 \begin_inset space ~
15739 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
15747 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
15749 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
15750 Single strikethrough
15758 arg "font-strikeout"
15762 \begin_inset Newline newline
15765 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
15766 changed in the meantime.
15769 \begin_layout Labeling
15770 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15772 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
15776 \begin_inset space ~
15780 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
15782 \begin_inset space ~
15786 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
15794 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
15796 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
15802 \begin_inset Newline newline
15805 This is used to make text hardly readable.
15809 \begin_layout Standard
15811 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600643
15812 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
15813 you access to the two builtin semantic character styles (see section
15814 \begin_inset space ~
15818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15820 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
15827 \begin_layout Itemize
15829 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
15836 This is text with emphasize on
15841 \begin_layout Itemize
15845 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
15852 This is text with Noun on.
15854 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
15861 , this is a logical attribute.
15862 Normally it's equivalent to
15865 \begin_inset space ~
15875 \begin_layout Standard
15876 So you have a huge number of combinations to
15877 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
15879 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
15884 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
15885 chosen a new character style
15886 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
15887 applied a text property
15890 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
15893 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15895 \begin_inset space ~
15898 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15900 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
15906 arg "dialog-show character"
15914 arg "dialog-show character"
15917 ) dialog, the settings are
15918 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
15922 You can activate the
15923 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
15925 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
15926 last applied properties
15928 by using the toolbar button
15931 arg "textstyle-apply"
15935 The button lets you apply
15936 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
15937 your custom character style
15938 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
15941 even when the dialog isn't visible.
15944 \begin_layout Standard
15945 To completely reset the
15946 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
15948 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
15949 text properties of a selection
15951 to the default, use
15959 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
15960 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
15961 you just set the shape to
15962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15980 \begin_inset space ~
15994 \begin_layout Standard
15996 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
15997 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16005 \begin_inset space ~
16017 \begin_layout Itemize
16019 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16032 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16050 \begin_inset Newline newline
16054 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16068 \begin_inset Note Note
16071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16072 For more on phantoms see section
16073 \begin_inset space ~
16077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16079 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16089 \begin_inset Newline newline
16095 \begin_layout Itemize
16097 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16102 fonts use characters with serifs.
16103 These are the small
16104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16111 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16112 The following example shows the difference:
16113 \begin_inset Newline newline
16117 \begin_inset Newline newline
16122 text without serifs
16125 \begin_inset Newline newline
16128 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16129 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16136 \begin_layout Itemize
16138 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16143 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16144 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16145 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16150 \begin_layout Standard
16152 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16160 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16161 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16164 \begin_inset space ~
16169 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16170 the property to be removed.
16171 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16172 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16173 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16191 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16192 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16200 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16204 \begin_inset space ~
16209 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16220 If you, for example, set
16221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16239 \begin_inset space ~
16244 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16253 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16258 \begin_layout Standard
16260 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16263 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16264 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16267 \begin_layout Section
16268 Printing and Previewing
16271 \begin_layout Subsection
16275 \begin_layout Standard
16276 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16277 using \SpecialChar LyX
16278 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16279 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16280 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16281 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16283 Additional Features
16288 \begin_layout Standard
16290 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16293 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16294 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16295 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16298 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16299 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16300 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16301 to turn your writing into printable output.
16302 This happens in two stages:
16305 \begin_layout Enumerate
16306 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16307 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16309 a file with the extension,
16310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16324 \begin_layout Enumerate
16325 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
16326 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16327 to use the commands in the
16331 file to produce printable output.
16334 \begin_layout Subsection
16335 Output file formats
16336 \begin_inset Index idx
16339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16348 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
16355 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16356 Simple text (ASCII)
16357 \begin_inset Index idx
16360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16361 File formats ! ASCII
16369 \begin_layout Standard
16370 This file type has the extension
16371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16383 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
16384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16387 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
16388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16394 \begin_layout Standard
16395 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
16397 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16398 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16400 \begin_inset space ~
16406 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
16407 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
16408 bibliography (section
16409 \begin_inset space ~
16413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16415 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16420 If your document includes such material, use
16422 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16423 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16425 \begin_inset space ~
16429 \begin_inset space ~
16433 \begin_inset space ~
16441 \begin_inset space ~
16445 \begin_inset space ~
16451 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16452 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16455 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16458 \begin_inset Index idx
16461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16462 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
16471 \begin_layout Standard
16472 This file type has the extension
16473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16484 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16487 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16488 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16489 -Errors or to process it manually
16490 with console commands.
16491 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16492 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16493 's temporary directory whenever you
16494 view or export your document.
16497 \begin_layout Standard
16498 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16499 -file using the menu
16501 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16502 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16506 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16507 export variants are explained in section
16508 \begin_inset space ~
16512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16514 reference "subsec:Export"
16521 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16523 \begin_inset Index idx
16526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16535 \begin_layout Standard
16536 This file type has the extension
16537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16557 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
16558 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16559 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16563 \begin_layout Standard
16564 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
16565 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16566 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
16567 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
16568 when you view the DVI.
16569 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
16572 \begin_layout Standard
16573 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
16575 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16576 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16581 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16582 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16584 \begin_inset space ~
16590 The latter option uses the program
16592 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16598 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16601 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16602 font access (see section
16603 \begin_inset space ~
16607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16609 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16614 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16615 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16620 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16622 \begin_inset Index idx
16625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16626 File formats ! PostScript
16634 \begin_layout Standard
16635 This file type has the extension
16636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16648 PostScript was developed by the company
16652 as a printer language.
16653 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
16655 PostScript can be seen as a
16656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16659 programming language
16660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16663 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
16667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16668 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16675 \begin_inset Index idx
16678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16680 packages ! pstricks
16690 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
16693 \begin_layout Standard
16694 PostScript can only contain images in the format
16695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16698 Encapsulated PostScript
16699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16702 (EPS, file extension
16703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16715 As \SpecialChar LyX
16716 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
16717 convert them in the background to EPS.
16718 If, for example, you have 50
16719 \begin_inset space ~
16722 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
16724 \begin_inset space ~
16727 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
16728 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
16730 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
16731 EPS to avoid this problem.
16734 \begin_layout Standard
16735 You can export to PostScript using the menu
16737 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16738 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16744 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16746 \begin_inset Index idx
16749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16756 \begin_inset Index idx
16759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16768 \begin_layout Standard
16769 This file type has the extension
16770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16786 Portable Document Format
16787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16794 was derived from PostScript.
16795 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
16797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16804 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
16805 looks exactly the same.
16808 \begin_layout Standard
16809 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
16810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16813 Joint Photographic Experts Group
16814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16817 (JPG, file extension
16818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16845 Portable Network Graphics
16846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16849 (PNG, file extension
16850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16862 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
16863 converts them in the
16864 background to one of these formats.
16865 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
16866 will slow down your workflow.
16867 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
16870 \begin_layout Standard
16871 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
16873 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16879 \begin_layout Description
16881 \begin_inset space ~
16884 (pdflatex) This uses the program
16888 which converts your file directly to PDF.
16891 \begin_layout Description
16893 \begin_inset space ~
16900 ) This uses the program
16902 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16905 which converts your file directly to PDF.
16908 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16911 is a new engine, derived from
16915 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
16916 access (see section
16917 \begin_inset space ~
16921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16923 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16928 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16929 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16934 \begin_layout Description
16936 \begin_inset space ~
16943 ) This uses the program
16948 that converts your file directly to PDF.
16954 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16955 font access (see section
16956 \begin_inset space ~
16960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16962 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16967 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
16968 vertically written Japanese.
16971 \begin_layout Description
16973 \begin_inset space ~
16976 (cropped) This is the same as
16979 \begin_inset space ~
16984 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
16985 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
16986 to generate good-looking
16987 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
16990 \begin_layout Description
16992 \begin_inset space ~
16995 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
16999 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17003 \begin_layout Description
17005 \begin_inset space ~
17008 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17012 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17013 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17017 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17018 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17021 \begin_layout Standard
17025 \begin_inset space ~
17034 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17035 works without problems.
17036 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17037 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17041 \begin_inset space ~
17049 \begin_inset space ~
17054 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17062 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17064 \begin_inset Index idx
17067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17068 FileFormats ! XHTML
17074 \begin_inset Index idx
17077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17086 \begin_layout Standard
17087 This file type has the extension
17088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17100 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17101 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17102 When \SpecialChar LyX
17103 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17104 suitable for the purpose.
17105 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17107 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17108 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17111 between different formats, which are described in section
17113 Math Output in XHTML
17118 \begin_inset space ~
17126 \begin_layout Standard
17127 XHTML output remains
17128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17135 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17136 features are supported yet.
17140 and the World Wide Web
17144 Additional Features
17146 manual, for more information.
17149 \begin_layout Standard
17150 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17152 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17153 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17159 \begin_layout Subsection
17161 \begin_inset Index idx
17164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17173 \begin_layout Standard
17174 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17175 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17184 or use the toolbar button
17191 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17192 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17193 \begin_inset space ~
17197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17199 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17203 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17205 \begin_inset space ~
17209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17211 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17216 Further output formats can be selected via
17218 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17219 View (Other Formats)
17221 or the toolbar button
17230 \begin_layout Standard
17231 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17232 viewer window using the menu
17234 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17239 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17240 Update (Other Formats)
17245 \begin_layout Standard
17246 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17249 To have a real output, export your document.
17252 \begin_layout Section
17253 A few Words about Typography
17254 \begin_inset Index idx
17257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17266 \begin_layout Subsection
17267 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17268 \begin_inset Index idx
17271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17278 \begin_inset Index idx
17281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17290 \begin_layout Standard
17291 In \SpecialChar LyX
17293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17304 symbol comes in four variants: the
17321 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17327 \begin_layout Standard
17328 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17338 height_special "totalheight"
17343 backgroundcolor "none"
17346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17347 \begin_inset Tabular
17348 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17349 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17350 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17351 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17352 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17353 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17354 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17382 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17383 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17422 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17423 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17445 system key combination
17449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17450 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
17453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17462 and the em dash with
17465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17478 is the Mac label for the right
17489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17502 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17503 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17525 system key combination or
17526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17540 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17553 \begin_inset Formula $-$
17561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17592 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17598 \begin_layout Standard
17599 Dashes can also be inserted with
17601 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17603 \begin_inset space ~
17606 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
17614 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
17615 and 2014 for the en dash).
17618 \begin_layout Standard
17619 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
17620 mode and has a length of its own.
17621 Here are some examples:
17624 \begin_layout Enumerate
17625 line- and page-breaks
17626 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17636 \begin_layout Enumerate
17638 \begin_inset space ~
17642 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17652 \begin_layout Enumerate
17653 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
17654 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17664 \begin_layout Enumerate
17665 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
17669 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17679 \begin_layout Standard
17681 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17683 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
17684 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
17692 \begin_layout Subsection
17693 Dashes and Line Breaks
17694 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17696 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
17703 \begin_layout Standard
17704 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
17705 case and locale, e.
17706 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17712 \begin_layout Itemize
17713 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
17714 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
17717 \begin_layout Itemize
17718 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
17722 \begin_layout Itemize
17723 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
17724 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
17727 \begin_layout Standard
17728 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
17729 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17740 allows line breaks after hyphens, en-dashes and em-dashes.
17743 \begin_layout Enumerate
17744 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
17745 \begin_inset space ~
17748 – common in British English and generally recommended by
17750 The Elements of Typographic Style
17753 \begin_inset space ~
17756 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
17759 \begin_layout Enumerate
17760 Unwanted line breaks after dashes can be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
17764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17767 Prevent Hyphenation
17772 \begin_inset space ~
17788 in \SpecialChar TeX
17794 \begin_layout Itemize
17796 \begin_inset space ~
17800 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17810 height_special "totalheight"
17815 backgroundcolor "none"
17818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17827 \begin_layout Itemize
17831 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17841 height_special "totalheight"
17846 backgroundcolor "none"
17849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17853 \begin_inset space ~
17861 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
17862 \begin_inset space ~
17865 – sont très utiles.
17868 \begin_layout Itemize
17875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17884 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
17888 \begin_layout Standard
17889 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
17890 \begin_inset space ~
17893 – in contrast to an overfull line
17894 \begin_inset space ~
17897 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17901 \begin_layout Standard
17902 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
17905 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17906 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17907 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
17908 Disallow line breaks after dashes
17913 \begin_layout Enumerate
17914 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
17915 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
17916 or \SpecialChar TeX
17922 \begin_layout Itemize
17926 \begin_inset space ~
17929 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
17930 \begin_inset space ~
17933 – sont très utiles.
17937 \begin_layout Enumerate
17938 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
17939 \begin_inset Newline newline
17944 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17945 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17946 Optional line break
17952 \begin_layout Itemize
17953 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
17954 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
17955 should be followed by
17956 a line break opportunity.
17959 \begin_layout Standard
17960 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
17961 \begin_inset space ~
17965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17967 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
17978 \begin_layout Enumerate
17979 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17980 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
17981 or en dashes (see section
17982 \begin_inset space ~
17986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17988 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
17998 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17999 Changes and backwards compatibility
18002 \begin_layout Standard
18003 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18005 \begin_inset space ~
18008 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18009 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18018 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18019 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18027 \begin_layout Standard
18028 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18030 \begin_inset space ~
18033 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18035 prevents ligation to dashes.
18037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18044 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18049 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18050 after the input (unless the current text font is
18058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18059 The behavior was changed since
18060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18075 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18076 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18077 as non-breakable dashes.
18078 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18087 \begin_layout Standard
18090 \begin_inset space ~
18098 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18100 \begin_inset space ~
18103 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18106 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18107 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18108 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18109 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18111 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18115 If you used both literal and
18116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18123 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18125 \begin_inset space ~
18128 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18129 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18132 \begin_layout Subsection
18134 \begin_inset Index idx
18137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18144 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18146 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18153 \begin_layout Standard
18154 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18155 but automatically in the output.
18156 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18162 \begin_inset Index idx
18165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18172 following the rules of the document language.
18174 does not hyphenate text in the
18178 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18181 \begin_layout Standard
18183 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18187 font and with unusual constructs, like
18188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18196 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18197 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18198 This is done with the menu
18200 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18201 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18203 \begin_inset space ~
18209 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18211 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18215 \begin_layout Standard
18216 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18217 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18228 would then see the hyphen
18229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18236 as a line break possibility.
18237 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18238 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18241 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18242 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18245 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18247 Prevent Hyphenation
18252 \begin_inset space ~
18260 \begin_layout Subsection
18262 \begin_inset Index idx
18265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18274 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18275 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
18276 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18278 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18285 \begin_layout Standard
18286 When \SpecialChar LyX
18287 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18288 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18290 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18296 appropriate amount of space.
18297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18300 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18302 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18303 gets after another word.
18306 \begin_layout Standard
18307 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18308 not work in all cases.
18310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18321 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18322 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18325 \begin_layout Standard
18326 Here are some examples of
18330 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18333 \begin_layout Itemize
18338 \begin_layout Itemize
18343 \begin_layout Standard
18344 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18347 \begin_layout Itemize
18349 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18353 this is too much space!
18356 \begin_layout Itemize
18361 \begin_layout Standard
18362 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18365 \begin_layout Standard
18366 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18369 \begin_layout Enumerate
18373 \begin_inset space ~
18378 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18379 \begin_inset space ~
18383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18385 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18390 \begin_inset Index idx
18393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18394 Spaces ! inter-word
18402 \begin_layout Enumerate
18406 \begin_inset space ~
18411 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18412 \begin_inset space ~
18416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18418 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18423 \begin_inset Index idx
18426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18435 \begin_layout Enumerate
18439 \begin_inset space ~
18443 \begin_inset space ~
18447 \begin_inset space ~
18454 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18456 \begin_inset space ~
18461 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
18462 This function is also bound to
18465 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
18471 \begin_layout Standard
18472 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
18475 \begin_layout Itemize
18477 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18481 \begin_inset space \space{}
18484 this is too much space!
18487 \begin_layout Itemize
18488 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
18492 \begin_layout Standard
18493 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
18494 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
18496 will take care of this.
18499 \begin_layout Standard
18500 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
18504 \begin_inset space ~
18510 feature described in the section
18512 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
18517 Additional Features
18522 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18524 \begin_inset Index idx
18527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18528 Typography ! Quotation marks
18534 \begin_inset Index idx
18537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18538 Quotation marks | see
18542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18568 \begin_layout Standard
18570 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
18571 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
18572 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
18574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18582 The keyboard character,
18586 , generates this automatically.
18589 \begin_layout Standard
18590 You can specify what character the
18594 key produces by using the submenu
18600 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18604 \begin_inset Index idx
18607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18608 Document ! Settings
18613 dialog and switching the
18617 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
18618 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
18620 \begin_inset space ~
18626 \begin_layout Labeling
18627 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18639 \begin_inset space ~
18643 \begin_inset space ~
18647 \begin_inset Quotes els
18651 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18665 \begin_inset Quotes els
18669 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18672 quotation marks (as common, e.
18673 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18679 \begin_layout Labeling
18680 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18683 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18687 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18691 \begin_inset space ~
18695 \begin_inset space ~
18699 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18703 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18709 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18713 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18717 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18721 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18724 quotation marks (as common, e.
18725 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18731 \begin_layout Labeling
18732 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18735 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18739 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18743 \begin_inset space ~
18747 \begin_inset space ~
18751 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18755 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18761 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18765 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18769 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18773 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18776 quotation marks (as common, e.
18777 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18783 \begin_layout Labeling
18784 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18787 \begin_inset Quotes pld
18791 \begin_inset Quotes prd
18795 \begin_inset space ~
18799 \begin_inset space ~
18803 \begin_inset Quotes pls
18807 \begin_inset Quotes prs
18813 \begin_inset Quotes pld
18817 \begin_inset Quotes prd
18821 \begin_inset Quotes pls
18825 \begin_inset Quotes prs
18828 quotation marks (as common, e.
18829 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18835 \begin_layout Labeling
18836 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18839 \begin_inset Quotes cld
18843 \begin_inset Quotes crd
18847 \begin_inset space ~
18851 \begin_inset space ~
18855 \begin_inset Quotes cls
18859 \begin_inset Quotes crs
18865 \begin_inset Quotes cld
18869 \begin_inset Quotes crd
18873 \begin_inset Quotes cls
18877 \begin_inset Quotes crs
18880 quotation marks (as common, e.
18881 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18884 g., in Switzerland)
18887 \begin_layout Labeling
18888 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18891 \begin_inset Quotes ald
18895 \begin_inset Quotes ard
18899 \begin_inset space ~
18903 \begin_inset space ~
18907 \begin_inset Quotes als
18911 \begin_inset Quotes ars
18917 \begin_inset Quotes ald
18921 \begin_inset Quotes ard
18925 \begin_inset Quotes als
18929 \begin_inset Quotes ars
18932 quotation marks (as common, e.
18933 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18939 \begin_layout Labeling
18940 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18943 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18947 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18951 \begin_inset space ~
18955 \begin_inset space ~
18959 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18963 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18969 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18973 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18977 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18981 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18984 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
18987 \begin_layout Labeling
18988 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18991 \begin_inset Quotes bld
18995 \begin_inset Quotes brd
18999 \begin_inset space ~
19003 \begin_inset space ~
19007 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19011 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19017 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19021 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19025 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19029 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19032 quotation marks (as common, e.
19033 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19036 g., in Great Britain)
19039 \begin_layout Labeling
19040 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19043 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19047 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19051 \begin_inset space ~
19055 \begin_inset space ~
19059 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19063 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19069 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19073 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19077 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19081 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19084 quotation marks (as common, e.
19085 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19091 \begin_layout Labeling
19092 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19095 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19099 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19103 \begin_inset space ~
19107 \begin_inset space ~
19111 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19115 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19121 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19125 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19129 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19133 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19136 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19141 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19142 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19143 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19144 the inner marks differ).
19152 \begin_layout Labeling
19153 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19156 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19160 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19164 \begin_inset space ~
19168 \begin_inset space ~
19172 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19176 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19182 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19186 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19190 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19194 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19197 quotation marks (as common, e.
19198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19204 \begin_layout Labeling
19205 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19208 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19212 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19216 \begin_inset space ~
19220 \begin_inset space ~
19224 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19228 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19234 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19238 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19242 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19246 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19249 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19252 \begin_layout Labeling
19253 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19254 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19262 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19268 \begin_inset space ~
19272 \begin_inset space ~
19278 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19286 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19290 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19294 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19298 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19302 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19305 quotation marks (as common, e.
19306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19314 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19315 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19323 \begin_layout Labeling
19324 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19325 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19333 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19339 \begin_inset space ~
19343 \begin_inset space ~
19349 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19357 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19361 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19365 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19369 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19373 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19376 quotation marks (as common, e.
19377 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19380 g., in North Korea and China)
19384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19385 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19386 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19394 \begin_layout Standard
19395 Inner quotation marks
19399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19400 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19401 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19402 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19410 does not necessarily mean
19411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19419 This is why we call them
19420 \begin_inset Quotes els
19424 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19440 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19442 \begin_inset Quotes els
19446 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19449 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
19452 arg "quote-insert inner"
19457 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19463 \begin_layout Standard
19464 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
19465 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
19466 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
19467 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
19468 If you check the setting
19470 Use dynamic quotation marks
19474 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19475 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19478 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
19479 they appear in a special color).
19480 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
19481 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
19483 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19486 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
19489 \begin_layout Standard
19490 Individual quotation marks (i.
19491 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19494 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
19495 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
19499 \begin_layout Subsection
19501 \begin_inset Index idx
19504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19505 Typography ! Ligatures
19511 \begin_inset Index idx
19514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19543 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19545 name "subsec:Ligatures"
19552 \begin_layout Standard
19553 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
19554 print them as single characters.
19555 These groups are known as
19560 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
19561 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
19563 Here are the standard ligatures:
19566 \begin_layout Itemize
19570 \begin_layout Itemize
19574 \begin_layout Itemize
19578 \begin_layout Itemize
19582 \begin_layout Itemize
19586 \begin_layout Standard
19587 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
19590 \begin_layout Standard
19591 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
19592 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
19593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19600 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
19601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19616 To break a ligature, use
19618 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19619 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19621 \begin_inset space ~
19628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19639 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19656 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19664 \begin_layout Subsection
19666 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
19668 \begin_inset Index idx
19671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19681 \begin_layout Standard
19684 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19685 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
19689 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
19692 \begin_layout Description
19694 The name of the game.
19697 \begin_layout Description
19699 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
19703 \begin_layout Description
19705 The \SpecialChar TeX
19706 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
19710 \begin_layout Description
19711 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
19712 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
19716 \begin_layout Standard
19717 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19723 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
19727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19731 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
19732 world to give programs geek version numbers.
19733 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
19734 converges to the number
19735 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
19738 : The actual version is
19739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19747 , the previous one was
19748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19759 \begin_layout Subsection
19761 \begin_inset Index idx
19764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19773 \begin_layout Standard
19774 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
19775 space between two words.
19776 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
19779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19786 for units use the menu
19788 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19789 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19791 \begin_inset space ~
19799 arg "space-insert thin"
19805 \begin_layout Standard
19806 Here is an example to show the differences:
19809 \begin_layout Standard
19810 \begin_inset Tabular
19811 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
19812 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19813 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
19814 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
19816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19821 \begin_inset space ~
19825 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
19833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19837 space between number and unit
19844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19849 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19853 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
19861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19865 half space between number and unit
19878 \begin_layout Subsection
19880 \begin_inset Index idx
19883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19884 Typography ! Widows and orphans
19892 \begin_layout Standard
19893 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
19895 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
19896 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
19897 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
19898 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
19899 These bits of text became known as
19910 \begin_layout Standard
19911 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
19912 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
19913 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
19914 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
19915 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
19916 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
19917 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
19918 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
19919 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
19920 \begin_inset Newline newline
19928 \begin_inset Newline newline
19936 \begin_inset Newline newline
19939 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19940 preamble of your document to avoid them.
19941 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
19943 \begin_inset space ~
19947 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
19949 key "latexcompanion"
19955 \begin_inset space ~
19959 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
19966 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
19967 's page break mechanism.
19970 \begin_layout Chapter
19971 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
19972 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19974 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
19981 \begin_layout Standard
19982 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
19985 \begin_inset space ~
19991 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
19994 \begin_layout Section
19996 \begin_inset Index idx
19999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20006 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20015 \begin_layout Standard
20017 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20020 \begin_layout Description
20023 \begin_inset space ~
20026 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20027 \begin_inset Newline newline
20031 \begin_inset Note Note
20034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20035 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20043 \begin_layout Description
20044 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20045 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20046 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20049 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20050 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20052 \begin_inset space ~
20058 \begin_inset Newline newline
20062 \begin_inset Note Comment
20065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20066 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20075 \begin_layout Description
20077 \begin_inset space ~
20080 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20081 set in the document settings under
20083 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20085 \begin_inset space ~
20091 \begin_inset Newline newline
20095 \begin_inset Newline newline
20099 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20108 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20109 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20114 of a comment that appears in the output.
20120 \begin_inset Newline newline
20124 \begin_inset Newline newline
20127 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20130 \begin_layout Standard
20131 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20139 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20143 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20146 \begin_layout Section
20148 \begin_inset Index idx
20151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20158 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20160 name "sec:Footnotes"
20167 \begin_layout Standard
20169 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20172 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20175 or the toolbar button
20178 arg "footnote-insert"
20190 \begin_inset Graphics
20191 filename clipart/footnote.png
20200 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20201 's representation of your footnote.
20211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20230 label, the box will
20234 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20235 Clicking on the box label again will close
20248 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20249 and click on the footnote
20264 \begin_layout Standard
20265 Here is an example footnote:
20273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20274 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
20282 \begin_layout Standard
20283 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
20284 position where the footnote box is placed.
20285 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20286 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20287 according to the document class.
20289 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20290 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20296 ey are described in the
20299 \begin_inset space ~
20307 \begin_layout Section
20309 \begin_inset Index idx
20312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20319 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20321 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20328 \begin_layout Standard
20329 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20331 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20333 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20335 \begin_inset space ~
20340 or the toolbar button
20343 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20369 appearing within your text.
20370 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20371 's representation of your margin
20380 \begin_layout Standard
20381 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20385 \begin_inset Marginal
20388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20390 This is a marginal note.
20398 \begin_layout Standard
20399 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20400 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20401 pages, right on odd pages.
20404 \begin_layout Standard
20405 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20408 \begin_inset space ~
20416 \begin_inset space ~
20424 \begin_layout Section
20425 Graphics and Images
20426 \begin_inset Index idx
20429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20436 \begin_inset Index idx
20439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20446 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20448 name "sec:Graphics"
20455 \begin_layout Standard
20456 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
20457 you want and click on the toolbar icon
20460 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20465 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20469 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
20472 \begin_layout Standard
20473 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
20478 tab allows you to choose your image file.
20479 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
20481 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
20482 \begin_inset space ~
20486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20488 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
20495 \begin_layout Standard
20500 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
20501 of the image in the output.
20502 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
20506 \begin_inset space ~
20510 \begin_inset space ~
20519 \begin_inset space ~
20523 \begin_inset space ~
20527 \begin_inset space ~
20532 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
20533 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
20541 \begin_layout Standard
20545 \begin_inset space ~
20549 \begin_inset space ~
20554 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
20555 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
20557 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
20562 \begin_inset space ~
20567 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
20568 with the image size is printed.
20571 \begin_layout Standard
20572 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
20573 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
20575 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
20578 \begin_layout Standard
20580 \begin_inset Graphics
20581 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
20589 \begin_layout Standard
20590 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
20591 the image into a float, see section
20592 \begin_inset space ~
20596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20598 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
20605 \begin_layout Subsection
20607 \begin_inset Index idx
20610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20617 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20619 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
20626 \begin_layout Standard
20627 You can insert images in any known file format.
20628 But as we explained in section
20629 \begin_inset space ~
20633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20635 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20639 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
20641 therefore uses the program
20645 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
20646 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
20647 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
20648 \begin_inset space ~
20652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20654 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20661 \begin_layout Standard
20662 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
20665 \begin_layout Description
20667 \begin_inset space ~
20670 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
20671 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
20672 Well-known bitmap image formats are
20673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20676 Graphics Interchange Format
20677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20680 (GIF, file extension
20681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20693 \begin_inset Index idx
20696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20728 Portable Network Graphics
20729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20732 (PNG, file extension
20733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20745 \begin_inset Index idx
20748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20780 Joint Photographic Experts Group
20781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20784 (JPG, file extension
20785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20809 \begin_inset Index idx
20812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20843 \begin_layout Description
20845 \begin_inset space ~
20848 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
20850 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
20851 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
20852 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
20853 \begin_inset Newline newline
20856 Scalable image formats can be
20857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20860 Scalable Vector Graphics
20861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20864 (SVG, file extension
20865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20877 \begin_inset Index idx
20880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20912 Encapsulated PostScript
20913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20916 (EPS, file extension
20917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20929 \begin_inset Index idx
20932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20964 Portable Document Format
20965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20968 (PDF, file extension
20969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20981 \begin_inset Index idx
20984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20999 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21000 result will not be scalable.
21001 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21007 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21015 \begin_layout Standard
21016 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21023 \begin_layout Subsection
21024 Grouping of Image Settings
21025 \begin_inset Index idx
21028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21029 Images ! Settings grouping
21037 \begin_layout Standard
21038 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21040 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21041 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21043 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21044 need to manually change each of them.
21048 \begin_layout Standard
21049 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21052 \begin_inset space ~
21056 \begin_inset space ~
21068 \begin_inset space ~
21072 \begin_inset space ~
21078 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21079 and checking the name of the desired group.
21082 \begin_layout Section
21084 \begin_inset Index idx
21087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21094 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21103 \begin_layout Standard
21104 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21107 arg "tabular-insert"
21112 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21116 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
21117 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21118 from the rest of the table.
21119 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21120 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21122 Here is an example table:
21125 \begin_layout Standard
21127 \begin_inset Tabular
21128 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21129 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21130 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21131 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21132 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21133 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21333 \begin_layout Subsection
21337 \begin_layout Standard
21338 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21341 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21345 This brings up the table dialog.
21346 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21347 cursor is placed currently.
21348 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21349 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21350 done on all of your selection.
21353 \begin_layout Standard
21354 In addition to the table dialog, the
21357 \begin_inset space ~
21362 helps you in setting table properties.
21363 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
21366 \begin_layout Standard
21370 \begin_inset space ~
21375 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
21376 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
21377 current cell respectively.
21378 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
21380 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
21381 of text, see section
21382 \begin_inset space ~
21386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21388 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
21395 \begin_layout Standard
21396 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
21397 using the check box
21406 This will merge the cells to
21410 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
21411 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
21412 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
21413 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
21414 in the last row without the upper border:
21417 \begin_layout Standard
21419 \begin_inset Tabular
21420 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
21421 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
21422 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21423 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
21424 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21425 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21436 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21445 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21521 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21556 \begin_layout Standard
21557 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21558 -arguments for the table.
21559 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
21560 explained in the chapter
21567 \begin_inset space ~
21573 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
21574 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
21575 but are visible in the output.
21578 \begin_layout Standard
21579 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21587 Most DVI-viewers are
21591 able to display rotations.
21599 \begin_layout Standard
21604 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
21609 adds lines for all cell borders.
21612 \begin_layout Subsection
21614 \begin_inset Index idx
21617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21618 Tables ! Multi-page
21624 \begin_inset Index idx
21627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21636 \begin_layout Standard
21637 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
21640 \begin_inset space ~
21644 \begin_inset space ~
21652 \begin_inset space ~
21657 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
21658 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
21661 \begin_layout Description
21666 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21667 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
21668 Except for the first page, if
21671 \begin_inset space ~
21679 \begin_layout Description
21683 \begin_inset space ~
21688 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21689 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
21692 \begin_layout Description
21697 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21698 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
21699 except for the last page, if
21702 \begin_inset space ~
21710 \begin_layout Description
21714 \begin_inset space ~
21719 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21720 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
21723 \begin_layout Description
21724 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
21725 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
21727 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21731 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
21734 \begin_inset space ~
21742 \begin_layout Standard
21743 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
21744 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
21745 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
21751 In this context, first means first in this order:
21754 \begin_inset space ~
21766 \begin_inset space ~
21771 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
21774 \begin_layout Standard
21776 \begin_inset Tabular
21777 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
21778 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
21779 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
21780 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21781 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21782 <row endfirsthead="true">
21783 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21789 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
21794 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21803 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21813 <row endfirsthead="true">
21814 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21825 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21834 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21846 <row endhead="true">
21847 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21858 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21867 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21877 <row endhead="true">
21878 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21889 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21898 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21910 <row endfoot="true">
21911 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21922 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21931 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21962 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22903 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22912 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22921 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22932 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22963 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22994 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23025 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23056 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23087 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23118 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23149 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23180 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23211 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23242 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23273 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23304 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23335 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23366 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23397 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23428 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23459 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23490 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23521 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23552 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23583 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23614 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23645 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23676 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23707 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23738 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23769 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23800 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23831 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23862 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23892 <row endlastfoot="true">
23893 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23904 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23913 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23930 \begin_layout Subsection
23932 \begin_inset Index idx
23935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23942 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23944 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
23951 \begin_layout Standard
23952 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
23953 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
23954 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
23955 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
23959 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
23962 \begin_layout Standard
23963 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
23964 for the column in the table dialog.
23965 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
23966 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
23970 \begin_layout Standard
23972 \begin_inset Tabular
23973 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
23974 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23975 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23976 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
23977 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23997 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24066 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24122 This is longer now.
24127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24178 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24179 This is longer now.
24184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24210 \begin_layout Standard
24211 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
24212 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
24216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24217 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
24218 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
24224 Selection with the mouse or with
24228 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
24229 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
24230 the selection from outside the table.
24233 \begin_layout Section
24235 \begin_inset Index idx
24238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24245 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24254 \begin_layout Subsection
24258 \begin_layout Standard
24259 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
24260 have a fixed location.
24262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24269 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
24277 \begin_inset space ~
24282 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
24283 too many notes on the current page.
24286 \begin_layout Standard
24287 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
24288 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
24289 and pages without text.
24290 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
24291 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
24292 Floats are therefore numbered.
24293 Referencing is described in section
24294 \begin_inset space ~
24298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24300 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24307 \begin_layout Standard
24308 To insert a float, use the menu
24310 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24314 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
24315 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
24317 After the label you can insert the caption text.
24318 \begin_inset Index idx
24321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24327 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
24328 paragraph within the float.
24329 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
24330 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
24331 left-clicking on the box label.
24332 A closed float box looks like this:
24333 \begin_inset Graphics
24334 filename clipart/float.png
24339 – a gray button with a red label.
24342 \begin_layout Standard
24343 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
24345 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
24348 \begin_layout Subsection
24350 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24352 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24357 \begin_inset Index idx
24360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24361 Floats ! Figure floats
24369 \begin_layout Standard
24371 \begin_inset space ~
24375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24377 reference "fig:A-star-in"
24381 was created using the menu
24383 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24384 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24390 arg "float-insert figure"
24394 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
24397 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24403 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24407 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
24408 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
24410 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24412 \begin_inset space ~
24420 arg "layout-paragraph"
24426 \begin_layout Standard
24427 \begin_inset Float figure
24432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24434 \begin_inset Graphics
24435 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24445 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24448 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24450 name "fig:A-star-in"
24467 \begin_layout Standard
24468 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
24469 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
24471 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24480 ) and refer to it using the menu
24482 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24488 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24492 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
24493 vague references like
24494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24501 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
24502 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
24504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24512 For more about cross-references, see section
24513 \begin_inset space ~
24517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24519 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24526 \begin_layout Standard
24527 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
24528 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
24529 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
24530 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
24531 as described in section
24532 \begin_inset space ~
24536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24538 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
24544 \begin_inset space ~
24548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24550 reference "fig:Two-images"
24554 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
24555 You can also set the images one below the other.
24557 \begin_inset space ~
24561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24563 reference "fig:Undefinable"
24568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24570 reference "fig:Star"
24574 are the subfigures.
24577 \begin_layout Standard
24578 \begin_inset Float figure
24583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24584 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24588 \begin_inset Float figure
24593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24594 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24597 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24599 name "fig:Undefinable"
24611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24612 \begin_inset Graphics
24613 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
24625 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24629 \begin_inset Float figure
24634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24635 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24653 \begin_inset Graphics
24654 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24666 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24673 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24676 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24678 name "fig:Two-images"
24695 \begin_layout Subsection
24697 \begin_inset Index idx
24700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24701 Floats ! Table floats
24709 \begin_layout Standard
24710 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
24712 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24713 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24716 or the toolbar button
24719 arg "float-insert table"
24723 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
24724 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
24725 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
24727 \begin_inset space ~
24731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24733 reference "tab:Table-float"
24740 \begin_layout Standard
24741 \begin_inset Float table
24746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24747 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24752 name "tab:Table-float"
24764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24766 \begin_inset Tabular
24767 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
24768 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24769 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24770 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24771 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24898 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
24906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24919 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24922 \end{array}\right]$
24930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24943 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
24964 \begin_layout Subsection
24966 \begin_inset Index idx
24969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24978 \begin_layout Standard
24980 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
24981 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
24982 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
24984 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
24992 \begin_inset space ~
25000 \begin_layout Section
25002 \begin_inset Index idx
25005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25014 \begin_layout Standard
25016 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25018 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25019 \begin_inset space \space{}
25026 \begin_layout Standard
25027 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25028 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25030 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25034 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25035 and its alignment within the page.
25038 \begin_layout Standard
25040 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25050 height_special "totalheight"
25055 backgroundcolor "none"
25058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25061 This is a minipage.
25062 The text is set in an italic style.
25065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25068 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25069 another formatting.
25077 \begin_layout Standard
25078 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25081 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25085 as described in section
25086 \begin_inset space ~
25090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25092 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25097 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25103 \begin_layout Standard
25104 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25114 height_special "totalheight"
25119 backgroundcolor "none"
25122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25123 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25124 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25130 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25134 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25144 height_special "totalheight"
25149 backgroundcolor "none"
25152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25153 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25154 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25162 \begin_layout Standard
25163 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25169 \begin_layout Standard
25170 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25172 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25179 \begin_inset space ~
25187 \begin_layout Chapter
25188 Mathematical Formulas
25189 \begin_inset Index idx
25192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25199 \begin_inset Index idx
25202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25233 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
25240 \begin_layout Standard
25241 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
25246 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
25249 \begin_layout Section
25251 \begin_inset Index idx
25254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25263 \begin_layout Standard
25264 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
25277 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
25279 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
25280 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
25281 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
25283 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25289 \begin_layout Standard
25290 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
25294 \begin_inset space ~
25299 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
25302 \begin_layout Standard
25303 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
25304 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
25307 \begin_layout Standard
25308 This is a line with an inline formula
25309 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
25315 \begin_layout Standard
25316 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
25317 paragraph, like this one:
25318 \begin_inset Formula
25325 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
25328 \begin_layout Standard
25330 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
25332 For example, typing
25333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25346 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
25347 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
25351 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
25354 \begin_inset space ~
25362 \begin_layout Subsection
25363 Navigating in Formulas
25364 \begin_inset Index idx
25367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25376 \begin_layout Standard
25377 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
25378 achieved with the arrow keys.
25380 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
25381 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
25386 will leave a formula construct (a square root
25387 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
25391 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
25395 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25398 \end{array}\right]$
25406 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
25411 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
25412 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
25415 \begin_layout Standard
25420 , printed in this document as
25421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25425 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25432 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
25433 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
25434 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
25439 For example, if you want
25440 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
25448 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25458 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25462 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25467 , since in the latter case only the
25470 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
25475 will be under the square root sign:
25476 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
25482 \begin_layout Standard
25483 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
25485 \begin_inset Formula
25487 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25496 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
25497 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
25500 \begin_layout Subsection
25504 \begin_layout Standard
25505 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
25506 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
25510 and a cursor movement key to select text.
25511 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
25512 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
25513 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
25514 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
25518 \begin_layout Subsection
25519 Exponents and Subscripts
25520 \begin_inset Index idx
25523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25530 \begin_inset Index idx
25533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25542 \begin_layout Standard
25543 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
25546 arg "math-superscript"
25552 arg "math-subscript"
25555 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
25557 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
25560 , type in a formula
25563 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25573 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
25579 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
25583 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
25589 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25595 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
25597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25604 , you have to use an extra
25608 to separate the circumflex and the character.
25609 For example, if you want
25610 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
25616 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25622 Subscripts are similar: To get
25623 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
25629 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25637 \begin_layout Subsection
25639 \begin_inset Index idx
25642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25651 \begin_layout Standard
25652 Create a fraction either with the command
25658 or by using the icon
25661 arg "math-insert \\frac"
25667 \begin_inset space ~
25673 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
25674 The cursor is above the fraction line.
25675 To move it to the bottom, simply press
25680 To move back up, press
25685 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
25686 \begin_inset Formula
25688 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
25691 \end{array}\right)}\right]
25699 \begin_layout Subsection
25701 \begin_inset Index idx
25704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25713 \begin_layout Standard
25714 Roots can be created using the
25717 \begin_inset space ~
25725 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
25731 arg "math-insert \\root"
25753 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
25759 always produces a square root.
25762 \begin_layout Subsection
25763 Operators with Limits
25764 \begin_inset Index idx
25767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25774 \begin_inset Index idx
25777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25784 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25786 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
25793 \begin_layout Standard
25795 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
25799 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
25802 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
25803 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25804 by entering them as you would enter a super-
25805 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
25806 The sum operator will automatically place its
25807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25814 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
25816 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
25820 \begin_inset Formula
25822 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
25827 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
25831 \begin_layout Standard
25832 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
25834 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
25835 behind the operator and using the menu
25837 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25838 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25840 \begin_inset space ~
25844 \begin_inset space ~
25858 \begin_layout Standard
25859 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
25860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25868 \begin_inset Index idx
25871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25878 \begin_inset Formula
25880 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
25885 which will place the
25886 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
25890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25898 In inline formulas it looks like this:
25899 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
25905 \begin_layout Standard
25906 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
25913 Have a look at section
25914 \begin_inset space ~
25918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25920 reference "subsec:Functions"
25924 for an explanation of function macros.
25927 \begin_layout Subsection
25929 \begin_inset Index idx
25932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25941 \begin_layout Standard
25942 Most math symbols can be found in the
25945 \begin_inset space ~
25950 under one of several categories; including
25967 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
25971 \begin_layout Standard
25972 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
25973 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
25974 don't have to use the
25977 \begin_inset space ~
25982 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
25984 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
25987 \begin_layout Subsection
25989 \begin_inset Index idx
25992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26001 \begin_layout Standard
26002 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26008 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26014 \begin_inset space ~
26022 arg "math-insert \\space"
26026 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26027 For example, the sequence
26032 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26035 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26037 \begin_inset Graphics
26038 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26043 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26044 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26045 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26046 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26047 , because they are negative
26049 Here are two examples:
26052 \begin_layout Standard
26062 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26068 \begin_layout Standard
26078 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26084 \begin_layout Subsection
26086 \begin_inset Index idx
26089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26096 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26098 name "subsec:Functions"
26105 \begin_layout Standard
26109 \begin_inset space ~
26114 contains under the button
26117 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26120 a number of function macros, such as
26121 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26125 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26133 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26140 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26141 avoid confusions, because
26142 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26146 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26152 \begin_layout Standard
26153 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26155 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26159 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26165 \begin_layout Standard
26166 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26167 are placed, as described in section
26168 \begin_inset space ~
26172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26174 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26181 \begin_layout Subsection
26183 \begin_inset Index idx
26186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26195 \begin_layout Standard
26196 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
26198 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
26199 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26200 commands, for example, to enter
26201 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26204 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
26205 Our example is entered by typing
26210 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26217 \begin_inset space ~
26221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26223 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
26227 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
26230 \begin_layout Standard
26231 \begin_inset Float table
26236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26237 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26240 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26242 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
26246 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
26254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26256 \begin_inset Tabular
26257 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
26258 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26259 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26260 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26261 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26345 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26399 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
26409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26453 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
26463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26507 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
26517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26561 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
26571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26615 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
26625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26669 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
26679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26723 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
26733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26777 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
26787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26822 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
26843 \begin_layout Standard
26844 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
26847 \begin_inset space ~
26855 arg "math-insert \\hat"
26858 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
26862 \begin_layout Section
26863 Brackets and Delimiters
26864 \begin_inset Index idx
26867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26874 \begin_inset Index idx
26877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26884 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26886 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
26893 \begin_layout Standard
26894 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
26896 For some purposes, using just the keys
26901 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
26902 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
26903 toolbar delimiter icon
26906 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
26910 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
26911 \begin_inset Formula
26913 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
26921 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
26922 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
26926 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
26929 and the expression on the right was entered using the
26935 \begin_inset Formula
26937 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
26945 \begin_layout Standard
26946 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
26947 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
26951 \begin_layout Standard
26952 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
26953 left side and right side.
26954 If you use the option
26957 \begin_inset space ~
26962 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
26963 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
26965 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
26970 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
26971 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
26974 \begin_layout Standard
26975 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
26976 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
26977 is to go inside the brackets.
26978 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
26983 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
26984 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
26985 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
26989 arg "math-delim ( )"
26995 \begin_layout Section
26996 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
26997 \begin_inset Index idx
27000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27007 \begin_inset Index idx
27010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27017 \begin_inset Index idx
27020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27021 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27029 \begin_layout Standard
27030 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27034 \begin_inset space ~
27042 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27046 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27047 Here is an example:
27048 \begin_inset Formula
27050 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27059 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27060 \begin_inset space ~
27064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27066 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27071 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27072 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27073 This alignment is set in the box
27078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27127 for every column as default.
27128 For example, the sequence
27129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27140 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27141 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27142 corresponds to the relevant column.
27143 The result will look like this:
27144 \begin_inset Formula
27147 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27148 column & has & has\,right\\
27149 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27158 \begin_layout Standard
27159 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27162 arg "newline-insert newline"
27165 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27166 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27168 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27171 or the math toolbar.
27174 \begin_layout Standard
27175 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27176 It can be created with the menu
27178 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27179 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27181 \begin_inset space ~
27193 Here is an example:
27194 \begin_inset Formula
27208 \begin_layout Standard
27209 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27212 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
27215 arg "newline-insert newline"
27219 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
27224 arg "newline-insert newline"
27227 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
27228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27235 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
27236 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
27237 A new row is created by every further entry of
27240 arg "newline-insert newline"
27244 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
27245 Here is an example:
27246 \begin_inset Formula
27248 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
27249 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
27254 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
27255 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
27256 \begin_inset Formula
27258 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
27266 \begin_layout Standard
27267 The multi-line formula type described here is called
27274 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
27275 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
27276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27278 reference "eq:asquared"
27283 The other types are described in section
27284 \begin_inset space ~
27288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27290 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27297 \begin_layout Section
27298 Formula Numbering and Referencing
27299 \begin_inset Index idx
27302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27303 Math ! Formula numbering
27309 \begin_inset Index idx
27312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27313 Math ! Referencing formulas
27319 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27321 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27328 \begin_layout Standard
27329 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
27331 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27332 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27334 \begin_inset space ~
27338 \begin_inset space ~
27346 arg "math-number-toggle"
27350 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27351 within parentheses.
27352 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
27353 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
27354 the document class.
27355 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
27356 separated by a dot:
27357 \begin_inset Formula
27367 arg "math-number-toggle"
27370 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
27371 You can only number displayed formulas.
27374 \begin_layout Standard
27375 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
27377 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27378 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27380 \begin_inset space ~
27384 \begin_inset space ~
27392 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
27395 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
27396 \begin_inset Formula
27399 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
27405 To number all lines use the shortcut
27408 arg "math-number-toggle"
27414 \begin_layout Standard
27415 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27418 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
27419 A label is inserted with the menu
27421 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27430 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
27431 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
27432 It is recommended that you use the suggested
27433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27444 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
27445 label type when you have many labels in your document.
27446 We inserted in the following example the label
27447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27454 in the second line:
27455 \begin_inset Formula
27457 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
27458 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
27463 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
27464 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
27465 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
27467 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27469 \begin_inset space ~
27477 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27481 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
27482 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27483 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
27484 as the formula number:
27487 \begin_layout Standard
27488 This is a cross-reference to equation (
27489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27491 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27498 \begin_layout Standard
27499 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
27500 's cross-reference box are described in section
27501 \begin_inset space ~
27505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27507 reference "sec:Cross-References"
27512 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
27520 \begin_layout Section
27521 User defined math macros
27522 \begin_inset Index idx
27525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27534 \begin_layout Standard
27536 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
27537 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
27538 Math macros are explained in section
27541 \begin_inset space ~
27553 \begin_layout Section
27557 \begin_layout Subsection
27559 \begin_inset Index idx
27562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27571 \begin_layout Standard
27572 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
27573 To set a font in a formula, use the
27576 \begin_inset space ~
27584 arg "math-insert \\font"
27587 , or enter its command, listed in table
27588 \begin_inset space ~
27592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27594 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27601 \begin_layout Standard
27602 \begin_inset Float table
27607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27608 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27613 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27617 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
27625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27627 \begin_inset Tabular
27628 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
27629 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27630 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27631 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27663 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
27671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27690 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
27698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27717 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
27725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27750 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
27758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27777 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
27785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27804 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
27812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27838 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
27846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27865 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
27873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27899 \begin_layout Standard
27900 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27908 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
27924 \begin_layout Standard
27925 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
27926 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
27931 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
27932 space when you need a space in the box.
27933 Here is an example where
27934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27945 denotes the set of numbers:
27946 \begin_inset Formula
27948 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
27956 \begin_layout Standard
27957 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
27958 You can, for example, put a character in
27967 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
27971 \begin_inset Newline newline
27974 So it is better not to use this feature.
27977 \begin_layout Standard
27978 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
27979 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
27983 \begin_inset Newline newline
27986 You can only print them emboldened using the command
27992 , which works like the other typeface commands:
27993 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
27999 \begin_layout Standard
28006 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28009 \begin_layout Standard
28010 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28012 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28013 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28015 \begin_inset space ~
28023 \begin_layout Subsection
28025 \begin_inset Index idx
28028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28037 \begin_layout Standard
28038 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28040 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28044 \begin_inset space ~
28048 \begin_inset space ~
28056 \begin_inset space ~
28064 arg "math-insert \\font"
28068 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28069 in black instead of blue.
28070 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28071 Here is an example:
28072 \begin_inset Formula
28075 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28076 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28085 \begin_layout Subsection
28087 \begin_inset Index idx
28090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28099 \begin_layout Standard
28100 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
28101 automatically chosen in most situations.
28119 For most characters,
28127 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
28128 and certain other structures, are set larger in
28133 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
28134 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28135 thinks are appropriate.
28136 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
28139 arg "math-insert \\style"
28143 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
28144 For example, you can set
28145 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
28148 , which is normally in
28157 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
28161 The four styles are used in the following example:
28164 \begin_layout Standard
28165 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
28169 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
28173 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
28177 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
28183 \begin_layout Standard
28184 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
28185 is set in a particular size with the menu
28187 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28189 \begin_inset space ~
28194 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
28195 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
28196 will be adjusted to correspond.
28197 As an example here is a formula in the font size
28198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28208 \begin_layout Standard
28212 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
28218 \begin_layout Section
28219 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28221 \begin_inset Index idx
28224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28231 \begin_inset Index idx
28234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28243 \begin_layout Standard
28245 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
28246 that are in common use.
28249 \begin_layout Subsection
28250 Enabling AMS-Support
28253 \begin_layout Standard
28254 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
28255 the document by selecting the checkbox
28258 \begin_inset space ~
28262 \begin_inset space ~
28266 \begin_inset space ~
28273 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28277 \begin_inset Index idx
28280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28281 Document ! Settings
28289 \begin_inset space ~
28295 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28296 -errors in formulas,
28297 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
28300 \begin_layout Subsection
28302 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28304 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28309 \begin_inset Index idx
28312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28313 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28321 \begin_layout Standard
28322 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28323 provides a selection of different formula types.
28325 allows you to choose between
28346 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
28347 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28354 , for an explanation of these formula types.
28357 \begin_layout Chapter
28361 \begin_layout Section
28363 \begin_inset Index idx
28366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28373 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28375 name "sec:Cross-References"
28382 \begin_layout Standard
28383 One of \SpecialChar LyX
28384 's strengths is cross-references.
28385 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
28387 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
28388 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
28389 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
28392 \begin_layout Enumerate
28396 \begin_layout Enumerate
28397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28399 name "enu:Second-item"
28406 \begin_layout Enumerate
28410 \begin_layout Standard
28411 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
28413 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28416 or by pressing the toolbar button
28423 A gray label box like this:
28424 \begin_inset Graphics
28425 filename clipart/label.png
28429 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
28431 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
28433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28466 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
28467 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
28469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28483 \begin_layout Standard
28484 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
28486 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28489 or the toolbar button
28492 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28496 A gray cross-reference box like this:
28497 \begin_inset Graphics
28498 filename clipart/reference.png
28502 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
28504 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
28505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28517 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
28521 \begin_layout Standard
28522 As an alternative to
28524 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28527 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
28532 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
28533 to the actual cursor position via the menu
28535 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28547 \begin_layout Standard
28548 Here is our cross-reference: Item
28549 \begin_inset space ~
28553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28555 reference "enu:Second-item"
28562 \begin_layout Standard
28563 It is recommended to use a protected space
28567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28568 described in section
28569 \begin_inset space ~
28573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28575 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
28584 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
28585 line breaks between them.
28588 \begin_layout Standard
28589 There are eight formats of cross-references:
28592 \begin_layout Description
28593 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
28594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28596 reference "fig:Two-images"
28603 \begin_layout Description
28604 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
28605 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
28607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28617 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28624 \begin_layout Description
28625 <page>: prints the page number: Page
28626 \begin_inset space ~
28630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28631 LatexCommand pageref
28632 reference "fig:Two-images"
28639 \begin_layout Description
28641 \begin_inset space ~
28645 \begin_inset space ~
28648 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
28649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28650 LatexCommand vpageref
28651 reference "fig:Two-images"
28656 \begin_inset Newline newline
28659 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
28660 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
28661 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
28662 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
28663 it prints “on the next page”.
28664 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
28667 \begin_layout Description
28669 \begin_inset space ~
28673 \begin_inset space ~
28677 \begin_inset space ~
28680 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
28681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28683 reference "fig:Two-images"
28688 \begin_inset Newline newline
28691 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
28697 ; otherwise it behaves like
28701 \begin_inset space ~
28705 \begin_inset space ~
28714 \begin_layout Description
28716 \begin_inset space ~
28719 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
28720 \begin_inset Newline newline
28724 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28732 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28742 \begin_inset Index idx
28745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28747 packages ! prettyref
28753 \begin_inset Index idx
28756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28758 packages ! refstyle
28769 \begin_inset Newline newline
28772 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
28773 -package should be used for this feature by setting
28776 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
28780 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28781 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28789 is the default and preferred because
28793 supports only English documents.
28794 The format is specified by using the command
28806 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28807 preamble of the document.
28808 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
28810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28826 \begin_inset Newline newline
28833 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
28838 \begin_inset Newline newline
28849 predefines reference formats for all available types.
28850 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
28852 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
28853 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
28858 , you might do so as follows:
28859 \begin_inset Newline newline
28866 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
28871 \begin_inset Newline newline
28874 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
28875 the package documentation
28876 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28878 key "prettyref,refstyle"
28884 \begin_inset Newline newline
28895 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
28902 \begin_layout Description
28904 \begin_inset space ~
28907 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
28908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28909 LatexCommand nameref
28910 reference "fig:Two-images"
28917 \begin_layout Description
28919 \begin_inset space ~
28922 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28923 label for the reference:
28924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28925 LatexCommand labelonly
28926 reference "fig:Two-images"
28931 \begin_inset Newline newline
28934 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
28935 Code, if you want to issue a command
28936 that \SpecialChar LyX
28942 , then you may want to use the
28945 \begin_inset space ~
28950 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
28952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28960 This is the form needed for e.
28961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28965 \begin_inset space \space{}
28972 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
28973 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
28975 The varieties are adjusted in the field
28979 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
28983 \begin_layout Standard
28984 You can only use the style
28988 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
28992 is always possible.
28995 \begin_layout Standard
28996 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
28997 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
28999 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29000 \begin_inset space ~
29004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29006 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29013 \begin_layout Standard
29014 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29018 \begin_inset space ~
29022 \begin_inset space ~
29027 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29028 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29031 \begin_inset space ~
29036 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29037 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29040 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29046 \begin_layout Standard
29047 You can change labels at any time.
29048 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29049 do not need to think about this.
29052 \begin_layout Standard
29053 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29055 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29059 \begin_layout Standard
29060 References are described in detail in the section
29061 \begin_inset space ~
29071 \begin_inset space ~
29079 \begin_layout Section
29080 Table of Contents and other Listings
29081 \begin_inset Index idx
29084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29091 \begin_inset Index idx
29094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29095 Navigating ! Outline
29101 \begin_inset Index idx
29104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29111 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29120 \begin_layout Subsection
29122 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29124 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
29131 \begin_layout Standard
29132 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
29134 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29135 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29137 \begin_inset space ~
29141 \begin_inset space ~
29147 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
29149 If you click on it, the
29153 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
29154 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
29155 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
29157 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29159 \begin_inset space ~
29164 that is described in section
29165 \begin_inset space ~
29169 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29171 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
29178 \begin_layout Standard
29179 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
29180 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
29182 \begin_inset space ~
29186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29188 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
29192 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
29194 \begin_inset space ~
29198 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29200 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
29204 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
29206 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
29209 \begin_layout Subsection
29210 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
29211 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29213 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29220 \begin_layout Standard
29221 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
29223 You can insert them via the
29225 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29229 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
29232 \begin_layout Section
29233 URLs and Hyperlinks
29234 \begin_inset Index idx
29237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29244 \begin_inset Index idx
29247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29256 \begin_layout Subsection
29258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29267 \begin_layout Standard
29268 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
29270 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29276 \begin_layout Standard
29277 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
29279 \begin_inset Flex URL
29282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29284 https://www.lyx.org
29292 \begin_layout Standard
29293 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
29299 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
29303 \begin_layout Standard
29304 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29312 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29321 \begin_layout Subsection
29323 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29325 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
29332 \begin_layout Standard
29333 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
29335 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29338 or with the toolbar button
29345 The appearing dialog has two fields:
29354 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
29355 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
29356 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29358 name "LyX's homepage"
29359 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29364 , an Email address like this:
29365 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29367 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
29368 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
29374 , or a link to a file.
29379 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29387 \begin_layout Standard
29388 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
29390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29401 to the link target.
29404 \begin_layout Standard
29405 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
29406 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
29407 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
29408 the text style dialog.
29409 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
29413 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29415 name "LyX's homepage"
29416 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29424 \begin_layout Standard
29425 The link text color can be changed, when the option
29429 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
29431 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29432 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29436 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
29438 \begin_inset Newline newline
29446 \begin_inset Newline newline
29453 in the PDF Properties dialog.
29456 \begin_layout Section
29458 \begin_inset Index idx
29461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29468 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29470 name "sec:Appendices"
29477 \begin_layout Standard
29478 Appendices are created with the menu
29480 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29482 \begin_inset space ~
29486 \begin_inset space ~
29492 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
29493 as the appendix part of the book.
29494 This part is marked with a red borderline.
29497 \begin_layout Standard
29498 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
29499 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
29500 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
29501 and the subsection number.
29502 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
29506 \begin_layout Standard
29508 \begin_inset space ~
29512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29514 reference "chap:Credits"
29519 \begin_inset space ~
29523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29525 reference "subsec:Export"
29532 \begin_layout Section
29534 \begin_inset Index idx
29537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29544 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29546 name "sec:Bibliography"
29553 \begin_layout Standard
29554 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
29556 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
29557 \begin_inset space ~
29561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29563 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29570 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
29575 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
29576 \begin_inset space ~
29580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29582 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
29587 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
29588 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
29589 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
29593 using a bibliography database.
29596 \begin_layout Standard
29597 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
29598 use two bibliographies in this document, a
29602 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
29603 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29604 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29605 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
29606 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
29609 \begin_layout Subsection
29610 The Bibliography Environment
29611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29613 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29620 \begin_layout Standard
29625 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
29627 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
29636 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
29638 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
29639 of ASCII characters only.
29643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29645 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29648 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
29654 \begin_inset Newline newline
29658 \begin_inset Flex URL
29661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29663 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
29675 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
29678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29685 , a short form of its title, as the key.
29686 \begin_inset Newline newline
29693 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
29694 the number of the entry.
29699 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29708 \begin_layout Standard
29709 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
29711 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29714 or the toolbar button
29717 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
29721 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
29722 containing the available citations.
29723 Select one or more keys from the list and
29733 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
29734 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
29738 \begin_layout Standard
29739 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
29740 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
29741 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
29743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29753 \begin_layout Standard
29757 Companion Second Edition
29760 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29762 key "latexcompanion"
29770 \begin_layout Standard
29771 The \SpecialChar LyX
29772 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
29773 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29783 \begin_layout Standard
29784 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29791 \begin_inset Index idx
29794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29802 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
29803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29814 Author A and Author B(Year)
29815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29822 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
29824 Then, if you select
29827 \begin_inset space ~
29832 in the document settings
29833 \begin_inset Index idx
29836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29837 Document ! Settings
29844 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
29846 \begin_inset space ~
29852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29854 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
29861 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
29864 \begin_layout Standard
29865 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
29868 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29870 \begin_inset space ~
29878 arg "layout-paragraph"
29882 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
29885 \begin_layout Subsection
29886 Bibliography databases
29887 \begin_inset Index idx
29890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29891 Bibliography ! Databases
29897 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29899 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29906 \begin_layout Standard
29907 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
29912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29913 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
29915 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
29916 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
29921 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
29923 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
29924 your working field in a database.
29925 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
29926 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
29927 list for that document.
29928 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
29932 \begin_layout Standard
29933 The database is a text file with the file extension
29934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29945 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
29946 The format is explained in
29947 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29954 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29956 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29958 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
29964 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
29965 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
29966 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
29968 \begin_inset Flex URL
29971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29973 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
29981 \begin_layout Standard
29983 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
29984 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29985 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
29987 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
29989 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
29990 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
29991 Those are addressed by
29996 \begin_inset Index idx
29999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30001 packages ! biblatex
30007 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30008 (although it has been significantly
30009 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30019 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30020 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30021 might conversely fail to correctly
30022 handle databases that use specific
30031 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
30035 \begin_layout Standard
30036 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30041 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
30043 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30047 \begin_inset Index idx
30050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30051 Document ! Settings
30063 \begin_inset space ~
30068 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30076 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30077 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30079 \begin_inset Index idx
30082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30083 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30092 \begin_layout Standard
30093 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30096 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30101 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30103 \begin_inset space ~
30109 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
30110 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30118 Add bibliography to TOC
30120 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
30125 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
30126 in the document or just the cited references.
30129 \begin_layout Standard
30130 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30131 style file is a text file with the file extension
30132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30143 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
30144 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30145 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
30146 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
30148 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
30153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30154 For information on how this is done, have a look at
30155 \begin_inset Newline newline
30159 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30161 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
30171 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30176 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
30180 \begin_layout Standard
30181 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
30184 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30186 \begin_inset Index idx
30189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30190 Bibliography ! Biblatex
30196 \begin_inset Index idx
30199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30201 packages ! biblatex
30209 \begin_layout Standard
30210 Accessing a database via
30214 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30217 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30222 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30224 \begin_inset space ~
30230 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30231 you cannot select a
30236 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30240 \begin_layout Standard
30245 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
30247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30258 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
30259 file (text file with the file extension
30260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30271 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
30272 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
30274 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
30278 \begin_layout Standard
30283 styles are not set in the
30286 \begin_inset space ~
30291 dialog, but in the document settings.
30292 \begin_inset Index idx
30295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30296 Document ! Settings
30301 However, in the dialog in the
30305 field, which is only visible if you use
30309 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
30310 example how its heading will appear).
30311 These options are deescribed in detail in the
30316 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30326 \begin_layout Standard
30327 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
30328 \begin_inset space ~
30332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30334 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30344 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30345 Bibliography Processors
30348 \begin_layout Standard
30349 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
30350 uses a bibliography processor,
30351 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
30352 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
30353 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30355 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
30356 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
30359 \begin_layout Standard
30360 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
30362 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
30363 You can do this on a general level in
30365 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30366 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30367 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30370 or for individual documents in
30372 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30373 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30377 The following variants are available by default:
30380 \begin_layout Description
30381 biber a specific, modern processor
30382 \begin_inset Index idx
30385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30392 developed exclusively for
30396 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30402 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
30407 makes use of; if you use the
30411 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
30418 \begin_layout Description
30419 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
30420 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
30421 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
30425 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
30428 \begin_layout Description
30429 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
30430 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
30434 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
30438 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
30442 features are supported.
30445 \begin_layout Standard
30446 By default (with the
30452 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30453 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30466 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30467 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30468 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30471 ), \SpecialChar LyX
30472 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
30485 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30486 -based bibliography styles).
30487 This should suit most needs.
30490 \begin_layout Standard
30491 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
30492 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
30493 (in \SpecialChar LyX
30498 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30499 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
30500 You can adjust it in
30502 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30503 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30504 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30510 \begin_layout Standard
30511 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
30512 can add below the selection.
30513 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
30514 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30520 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30530 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30534 \begin_layout Standard
30536 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
30538 These are explained in detail in section
30540 Customizing Bibliographies
30544 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30549 Additional Features
30554 \begin_layout Subsection
30556 \begin_inset Index idx
30559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30560 Bibliography ! Citation format
30566 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30568 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
30575 \begin_layout Standard
30576 Many different citation formats are common, e.
30577 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30581 \begin_inset space \space{}
30584 numerical citation (as
30585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30592 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
30593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30600 ) or author-year citations (as
30601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30610 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
30614 \begin_layout Standard
30615 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
30618 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30619 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30623 \begin_inset Index idx
30626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30627 Document ! Settings
30632 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
30638 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
30639 labels, is there to use
30642 \begin_inset space ~
30653 \begin_inset space ~
30658 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
30659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30661 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30668 \begin_layout Standard
30669 With a bibliography database (see
30670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30672 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30679 ) one has in contrary to the
30683 environment full access to the formatting styles.
30684 These style formats are available:
30687 \begin_layout Description
30689 \begin_inset space ~
30692 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30693 -based approached without any additional packages
30694 (simple numeric citations).
30697 \begin_layout Description
30698 Biblatex loads the package
30703 \begin_inset Index idx
30706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30708 packages ! biblatex
30713 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
30715 Biblatex citation style
30719 Biblatex bibliography style
30722 Options to the package
30726 can be entered in the
30733 \begin_layout Description
30735 \begin_inset space ~
30739 \begin_inset space ~
30742 mode) loads the package
30746 with the natbib compatibility mode.
30747 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
30759 behavior very closely.
30764 this option has some additional styles.
30769 styles are also supported by this variant.
30772 \begin_layout Description
30774 \begin_inset space ~
30777 (BibTeX) loads the package
30782 \begin_inset Index idx
30785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30792 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
30795 \begin_layout Description
30797 \begin_inset space ~
30800 (BibTeX) loads the package
30805 \begin_inset Index idx
30808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30815 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
30818 \begin_layout Standard
30827 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
30829 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
30838 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
30840 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
30841 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
30843 Biblatex citation style
30846 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
30852 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
30856 \begin_layout Standard
30857 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
30858 are available in the
30863 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
30864 a name prefix such as
30865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30880 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
30881 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30885 \begin_inset space \space{}
30889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30900 \begin_layout Standard
30901 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
30903 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30907 \begin_inset space \space{}
30910 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
30912 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30916 \begin_inset space \space{}
30920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30932 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30936 \begin_inset space ~
30944 \begin_inset space ~
30950 Here is a simple example where the text
30951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30955 \begin_inset space ~
30959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30962 appears after the reference:
30965 \begin_layout Quote
30967 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30970 key "latexcompanion"
30978 \begin_layout Standard
30979 All styles except for
30983 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
30985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30993 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
30997 \begin_layout Standard
30998 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
30999 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
31000 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
31005 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
31006 multi-citation (so-called
31007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31010 qualified citation lists
31011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31017 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
31022 dialog will display three columns in the field
31029 \begin_inset space ~
31037 \begin_inset space ~
31045 \begin_inset space ~
31051 If you double-click on an item's
31054 \begin_inset space ~
31062 \begin_inset space ~
31067 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
31070 General text before
31076 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
31079 \begin_layout Section
31081 \begin_inset Index idx
31084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31091 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31100 \begin_layout Standard
31101 An index entry is created if you use the menu
31103 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31105 \begin_inset space ~
31110 or the toolbar button
31117 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
31118 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
31119 by \SpecialChar LyX
31120 as the index entry.
31123 \begin_layout Standard
31124 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
31126 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31127 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31129 \begin_inset space ~
31135 A light blue box labeled
31136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31147 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
31148 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
31152 \begin_layout Standard
31153 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
31154 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31155 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
31156 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31158 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31160 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
31168 \begin_layout Subsection
31169 Grouping Index Entries
31170 \begin_inset Index idx
31173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31182 \begin_layout Standard
31183 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
31185 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
31186 lists under the entry
31187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31195 First we create the entry
31196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31204 \begin_inset space ~
31208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31210 reference "subsec:Lists"
31215 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
31216 \begin_inset space ~
31220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31222 reference "sec:Itemize"
31226 , we insert the command
31229 \begin_layout Standard
31235 \begin_layout Standard
31239 \begin_layout Standard
31245 \begin_layout Standard
31246 for the enumerated list in section
31247 \begin_inset space ~
31251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31253 reference "sec:Enumerate"
31260 \begin_layout Standard
31261 The exclamation mark
31262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31269 marks the grouping levels.
31270 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
31271 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
31272 If we don't have an index entry for
31273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31280 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
31283 \begin_layout Subsection
31285 \begin_inset Index idx
31288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31289 Index ! Page ranges
31297 \begin_layout Standard
31298 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
31300 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
31301 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
31302 an index entry in section
31303 \begin_inset space ~
31307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31309 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
31316 \begin_layout Standard
31319 Paragraph environments|(
31322 \begin_layout Standard
31323 and another entry at the end of section
31324 \begin_inset space ~
31328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31330 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
31337 \begin_layout Standard
31340 Paragraph environments|)
31343 \begin_layout Standard
31345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31368 respectively start and end the index range.
31369 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
31370 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
31371 the pages of the indexed document parts.
31372 An example is the index entry
31373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31376 Document ! Settings
31377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31383 \begin_layout Subsection
31385 \begin_inset Index idx
31388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31389 Index ! Cross referencing
31397 \begin_layout Standard
31398 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
31399 We referred for example in the index entry
31400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31408 \begin_inset space ~
31412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31414 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
31418 ) to the index entry
31419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31426 in the same section using the entry
31429 \begin_layout Standard
31432 GIF|see{Image formats}
31435 \begin_layout Standard
31436 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31438 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
31439 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
31442 \begin_layout Subsection
31444 \begin_inset Index idx
31447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31448 Index ! Entry order
31456 \begin_layout Standard
31457 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
31458 follow the rules for the index order.
31459 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
31464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31465 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
31467 \begin_inset space ~
31471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31473 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31482 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
31483 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
31484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31508 \begin_inset Index idx
31511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31512 Dummy entries ! maïs
31518 \begin_inset Index idx
31521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31522 Dummy entries ! maître
31528 \begin_inset Index idx
31531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31532 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
31537 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
31538 maïs, maison, maître.
31539 To achieve this, we use the command
31542 \begin_layout Standard
31545 previous entry@current entry
31548 \begin_layout Standard
31549 In our case we want to have
31550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31565 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
31568 \begin_layout Standard
31574 \begin_layout Standard
31575 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
31576 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
31578 See the next subsection for an example.
31581 \begin_layout Subsection
31583 \begin_inset Index idx
31586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31587 Index ! Entry layout
31595 \begin_layout Standard
31596 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
31597 \begin_inset Index idx
31600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31603 This is an italic dummy entry
31608 You can also format the page number using the character
31609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31616 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31617 -command without a backslash.
31618 We can write for example
31621 \begin_layout Standard
31624 italic page number:|textit
31627 \begin_layout Standard
31628 to get the page number in italic.
31629 \begin_inset Index idx
31632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31633 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
31638 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
31639 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
31641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31657 \begin_inset space ~
31663 Have a look at section
31664 \begin_inset space ~
31668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31670 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31674 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31678 \begin_layout Standard
31679 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31687 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
31691 to generate the index, see section
31692 \begin_inset space ~
31696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31698 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31707 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
31712 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
31713 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31716 key "latexcompanion"
31729 \begin_layout Standard
31730 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
31732 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
31733 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
31734 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
31735 If so, put the following in the preamble
31738 \begin_layout Standard
31750 \begin_layout Standard
31754 \begin_layout Standard
31760 \begin_layout Standard
31761 in the index entry.
31762 \begin_inset Index idx
31765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31766 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
31771 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
31772 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
31773 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
31776 \begin_layout Standard
31777 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
31778 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
31779 a bold font for all index entries.
31780 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
31792 documentation for details,
31793 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31795 key "makeindex,xindy"
31803 \begin_layout Subsection
31805 \begin_inset Index idx
31808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31817 name "subsec:Index-Program"
31824 \begin_layout Standard
31825 If the index generation program
31829 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
31830 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
31834 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31835 distribution, is used.
31839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31844 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
31845 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
31846 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
31847 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
31848 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
31858 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
31860 dialog, see section
31861 \begin_inset space ~
31865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31867 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31872 The available options are listed and explained in
31873 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31875 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
31881 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
31885 \begin_layout Standard
31886 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
31887 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
31890 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31891 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31895 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
31896 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
31899 \begin_layout Subsection
31903 \begin_layout Standard
31904 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
31905 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
31906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31913 next to the standard index.
31915 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
31916 that add this feature.
31923 \begin_inset Index idx
31926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31928 packages ! splitidx
31933 package to generate multiple indexes.
31934 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
31939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31940 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
31942 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31950 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31951 style, but it also includes
31952 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
31953 Please consult the package's manual for details.
31961 \begin_layout Standard
31962 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
31963 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
31965 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31966 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31969 and select the option
31971 Use multiple Indexes
31978 already contains the standard index
31979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31987 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
31988 also appear as a heading) to the
31992 input field and press the
31997 The new index now also appears in the list.
31998 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
31999 label color to the new index.
32002 \begin_layout Standard
32003 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
32006 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32013 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
32014 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
32015 are additional features:
32018 \begin_layout Itemize
32019 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
32020 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
32023 \begin_layout Itemize
32024 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
32025 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
32030 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
32031 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
32032 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
32033 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
32036 \begin_layout Itemize
32041 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
32042 code in the name of the index.
32045 \begin_layout Section
32046 Nomenclature/Glossary
32047 \begin_inset Index idx
32050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32057 \begin_inset Index idx
32060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32089 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32091 name "sec:Nomenclature"
32098 \begin_layout Standard
32099 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
32100 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
32101 called nomenclature or glossary.
32104 \begin_layout Standard
32105 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32112 \begin_inset Index idx
32115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32123 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32125 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32132 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32136 \begin_layout Standard
32137 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
32138 and then use the menu
32140 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32146 \begin_inset space ~
32151 or the toolbar button
32154 arg "nomencl-insert"
32159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32170 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
32173 \begin_layout Standard
32174 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
32175 The first is the term or
32179 that you wish to define.
32184 of the term or symbol.
32187 \begin_layout Standard
32188 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32196 To use \SpecialChar TeX
32197 code for nomenclature entries the option
32201 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
32209 \begin_layout Subsection
32210 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
32211 \begin_inset Index idx
32214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32215 Nomenclature ! Layout
32223 \begin_layout Standard
32224 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
32228 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
32231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32235 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32243 \begin_inset Newline newline
32251 \begin_inset Newline newline
32257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32264 character starts/ends the formula.
32265 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32266 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
32268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32278 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
32288 \begin_layout Standard
32289 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32290 syntax is given in section
32291 \begin_inset space ~
32295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32297 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32304 \begin_layout Standard
32308 \begin_inset space ~
32313 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
32315 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
32316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32320 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32327 in this document is:
32328 \begin_inset Newline newline
32333 dummy entry for the character
32338 \begin_inset Newline newline
32350 \begin_inset space ~
32360 font use the command
32389 \begin_layout Standard
32390 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
32391 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32395 \begin_inset space \space{}
32399 \begin_inset Newline newline
32415 \begin_inset Newline newline
32418 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
32419 This command will make the font of all symbols
32426 \begin_inset space ~
32434 \begin_layout Standard
32435 If the characters |
32436 \begin_inset space \space{}
32440 \begin_inset space \space{}
32444 \begin_inset space \space{}
32448 \begin_inset space \space{}
32452 \begin_inset space \space{}
32455 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
32456 code they need to be escaped
32457 by adding a quote character in front of them.
32458 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32459 LatexCommand nomenclature
32460 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
32461 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
32469 \begin_layout Subsection
32470 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
32471 \begin_inset Index idx
32474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32475 Nomenclature ! Sort order
32483 \begin_layout Standard
32484 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32485 -code of the symbol
32487 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
32489 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
32492 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32493 LatexCommand nomenclature
32495 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
32503 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32507 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32508 LatexCommand nomenclature
32511 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
32517 They will be sorted by
32518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32544 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32547 will be sorted before the
32551 since the character
32552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32559 is considered in sorting.
32562 \begin_layout Standard
32563 To control the sort order, you can edit the
32566 \begin_inset space ~
32571 field of the nomenclature dialog.
32572 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
32574 For the example given, you can insert
32578 in this field for the
32579 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32586 will be located before
32587 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32593 \begin_layout Standard
32594 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
32599 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32609 \begin_layout Subsection
32610 Nomenclature Options
32611 \begin_inset Index idx
32614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32615 Nomenclature ! Options
32621 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32623 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
32630 \begin_layout Standard
32635 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
32636 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
32639 \begin_layout Description
32640 refeq Appends the phrase
32641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32656 to every nomenclature entry, where
32662 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
32665 \begin_layout Description
32666 refpage Appends the phrase
32667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32682 to every nomenclature entry, where
32688 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
32691 \begin_layout Description
32692 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
32695 \begin_layout Standard
32696 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
32697 class options list in the
32699 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32703 In this document the options
32710 \begin_layout Standard
32711 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32717 \begin_layout Standard
32718 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
32719 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
32724 field in the nomenclature dialog:
32727 \begin_layout Description
32737 \begin_layout Description
32740 nomrefpage Like the
32747 \begin_layout Description
32750 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
32759 \begin_layout Description
32763 \begin_inset space ~
32769 \begin_inset space ~
32774 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
32777 \begin_layout Standard
32779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32786 are automatically translated for most document languages.
32787 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
32791 \begin_layout Standard
32800 \begin_inset Newline newline
32806 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32810 \begin_inset space ~
32822 unskip, see equation
32825 \begin_inset Newline newline
32832 pagedeclaration}[1]{
32833 \begin_inset Newline newline
32839 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32843 \begin_inset space ~
32860 \begin_layout Standard
32861 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
32864 \begin_inset space ~
32869 in the document settings under
32872 \begin_inset space ~
32880 \begin_layout Standard
32888 \begin_inset Newline newline
32892 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32896 \begin_inset space ~
32908 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
32910 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
32911 \begin_inset Newline newline
32918 pagedeclaration}[1]{
32919 \begin_inset Newline newline
32923 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32927 \begin_inset space ~
32939 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
32944 \begin_layout Subsection
32945 Printing the Nomenclature
32946 \begin_inset Index idx
32949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32950 Nomenclature ! Printing
32958 \begin_layout Standard
32959 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
32961 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32962 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
32967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32978 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
32979 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
32980 You can choose between these settings:
32983 \begin_layout Description
32984 Default a space of 1
32985 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32991 \begin_layout Description
32993 \begin_inset space ~
32997 \begin_inset space ~
33000 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
33003 \begin_layout Description
33004 Custom custom space
33007 \begin_layout Standard
33008 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
33009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33017 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
33025 For example, in order to change the name to
33029 , add the following line to the preamble:
33032 \begin_layout Standard
33045 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
33048 \begin_layout Standard
33049 When you are using another document language than English, replace
33050 \begin_inset Newline newline
33065 , where *** is the name of the language used.
33068 \begin_layout Subsection
33069 Nomenclature Program
33070 \begin_inset Index idx
33073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33074 Nomenclature ! Program
33080 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33082 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
33089 \begin_layout Standard
33095 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33096 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
33098 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
33103 by adding options, see section
33104 \begin_inset space ~
33108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33110 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33115 The available options are listed and explained in
33116 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33118 key "nomencl,makeindex"
33126 \begin_layout Section
33128 \begin_inset Index idx
33131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33138 \begin_inset Index idx
33141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33142 Document ! Branches
33148 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33150 name "sec:Branches"
33157 \begin_layout Standard
33158 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
33159 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
33160 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
33161 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
33164 \begin_layout Standard
33165 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
33166 allows you to put text into branches.
33167 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
33168 To create a branch, either select the menu
33170 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33171 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
33174 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
33176 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33183 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
33184 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
33185 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
33186 and whether the name of the branch should
33187 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
33188 (see below for an example).
33189 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
33190 to the name of the other) and to add
33191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33199 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33203 \begin_inset space ~
33206 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
33207 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
33210 \begin_layout Standard
33211 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
33212 These boxes are inserted via the menu
33214 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33217 where you can choose a branch.
33218 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
33222 \begin_layout Standard
33223 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
33224 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
33227 \begin_layout Standard
33228 \begin_inset Branch Question
33232 \begin_layout Standard
33237 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
33245 \begin_layout Standard
33246 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33250 \begin_layout Standard
33255 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
33263 \begin_layout Standard
33270 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33271 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33274 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
33275 Consider for example a file
33276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33283 which has the above branches.
33285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33292 is active, the PDF export file would be called
33293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33316 branch were inactive,
33317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33332 branch was active, likewise
33333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33348 branch was active, and
33349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33352 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
33353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33356 if both branches were active.
33357 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
33358 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33364 \begin_layout Standard
33365 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
33371 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
33372 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
33376 \begin_inset space ~
33384 \begin_layout Standard
33385 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33389 \begin_layout Standard
33395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33402 branch is deactivated.
33408 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33414 \begin_layout Standard
33415 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
33416 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
33417 definitions for each branch.
33418 For example you can define for the question branch
33422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33423 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33424 -syntax, see section
33425 \begin_inset space ~
33429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33431 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33443 \begin_layout Standard
33453 \begin_layout Standard
33463 \begin_layout Standard
33464 and for the answer branch
33467 \begin_layout Standard
33477 \begin_layout Standard
33487 \begin_layout Standard
33488 \begin_inset Branch Question
33492 \begin_layout Standard
33496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33524 \begin_layout Standard
33525 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33529 \begin_layout Standard
33533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33561 \begin_layout Standard
33562 Now it is possible to use the
33566 question{\SpecialChar ldots
33573 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
33576 commands to obtain conditional output.
33577 Here is an example formula where only the
33584 \begin_inset Formula
33586 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
33594 \begin_layout Standard
33595 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
33603 \begin_layout Standard
33604 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
33606 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33610 \begin_inset space \space{}
33613 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
33615 For this advanced usage, see the
33621 Flex insets and InsetLayout
33626 \begin_layout Section
33628 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33630 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
33635 \begin_inset Index idx
33638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33647 \begin_layout Standard
33650 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33651 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33654 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
33656 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33662 \begin_inset Index idx
33665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33667 packages ! hyperref
33672 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
33673 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
33674 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
33675 part of the document.
33679 \begin_layout Standard
33680 The header information in the dialog tab
33684 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
33685 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
33686 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
33687 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
33691 \begin_inset space ~
33695 \begin_inset space ~
33700 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
33701 tries to extract the header information from your document title
33702 and author entries.
33706 \begin_inset space ~
33710 \begin_inset space ~
33714 \begin_inset space ~
33719 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
33722 \begin_layout Standard
33723 You can specify in the dialog tab
33727 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
33732 \begin_inset space ~
33736 \begin_inset space ~
33740 \begin_inset space ~
33745 option allows long links to be split;
33748 \begin_inset space ~
33752 \begin_inset space ~
33756 \begin_inset space ~
33764 \begin_inset space ~
33769 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
33772 \begin_inset space ~
33777 colors the different links.
33778 The default colors are:
33781 \begin_layout Labeling
33782 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33787 for hyperlinks and URLs
33790 \begin_layout Labeling
33791 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33799 \begin_layout Labeling
33800 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33808 \begin_layout Standard
33809 but you can change these in the field
33814 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
33817 \begin_layout Standard
33820 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
33823 \begin_layout Standard
33828 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
33829 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
33830 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
33833 \begin_layout Standard
33838 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
33839 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
33840 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
33850 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
33851 when opening the PDF.
33853 \begin_inset space ~
33856 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
33857 \begin_inset space ~
33860 1 will only display the sections.
33863 \begin_layout Standard
33864 PDF properties are also used in this document.
33865 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
33871 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
33872 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33882 \begin_layout Section
33884 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33888 name "sec:TeX-Code"
33895 \begin_layout Subsection
33898 \begin_inset Index idx
33901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33909 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33911 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
33918 \begin_layout Standard
33919 As \SpecialChar LyX
33920 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
33921 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
33922 commands and constructs,
33925 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
33926 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
33927 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
33928 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33929 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
33930 cannot support all packages and
33934 \begin_layout Standard
33935 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
33936 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
33937 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
33941 Code box is created by the menu
33943 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33945 \begin_inset space ~
33950 or by the toolbar button
33963 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
33971 \begin_layout Standard
33972 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
33974 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
33976 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
33980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33981 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
33986 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33993 , you can write the command part
33999 in a \SpecialChar TeX
34000 Code box before the word and the closing brace
34004 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
34005 Code box behind the word.
34006 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
34007 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
34011 \begin_layout Standard
34012 \begin_inset Graphics
34013 filename clipart/ERT.png
34021 \begin_layout Standard
34025 \begin_layout Standard
34026 This is a line with a
34030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34053 \begin_layout Standard
34054 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34062 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34063 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
34064 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
34065 know that the command is finished.
34073 \begin_layout Subsection
34074 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34076 \begin_inset Argument 1
34079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34080 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34087 \begin_inset Index idx
34090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34098 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34100 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34107 \begin_layout Standard
34108 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
34109 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34110 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
34111 uses in the background.
34112 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
34113 is based on commands, you can
34114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34122 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
34123 any time if you know the right commands.
34124 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
34125 is the end of the day.
34126 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
34127 all caption labels bold.
34128 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
34130 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
34134 \begin_layout Standard
34135 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
34137 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34139 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34142 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34152 \begin_layout Standard
34153 As result you find that the package
34158 \begin_inset Index idx
34161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34169 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
34171 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34174 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34178 \begin_inset space ~
34186 \begin_layout Standard
34191 usepackage[options]{package name}
34194 \begin_layout Standard
34195 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
34196 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
34197 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
34198 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
34201 \begin_layout Standard
34202 In your case the package name is
34207 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
34212 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
34213 So you add the command
34216 \begin_layout Standard
34221 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
34224 \begin_layout Standard
34225 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
34229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34230 For more commands provided by the
34234 package, have a look at its documentation,
34235 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34250 \begin_layout Standard
34251 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
34253 For example if you use a
34257 class, you don't need the package
34261 , you can instead write
34264 \begin_layout Standard
34269 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
34274 \begin_layout Standard
34275 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
34276 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
34277 documentation of the document class you want to use.
34284 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
34287 \begin_layout Standard
34288 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
34289 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
34291 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34292 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
34293 Code box as described in the previous
34297 \begin_layout Standard
34298 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
34299 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34302 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34304 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
34312 \begin_layout Standard
34313 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34319 \begin_layout Standard
34323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34333 \begin_inset Note Note
34336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34337 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
34345 \begin_layout Left Header
34346 \begin_inset Argument 1
34349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34369 \begin_inset Note Note
34372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34373 defines the header line as described below
34381 \begin_layout Center Header
34382 \begin_inset Argument 1
34385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34394 \begin_layout Right Header
34395 \begin_inset Argument 1
34398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34419 \begin_layout Left Footer
34420 \begin_inset Argument 1
34423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34444 \begin_layout Center Footer
34445 \begin_inset Argument 1
34448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34460 \begin_inset Newline newline
34464 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34470 \begin_layout Right Footer
34471 \begin_inset Argument 1
34474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34496 \begin_layout Section
34497 Customized Page Headers and Footers
34498 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34500 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
34505 \begin_inset Index idx
34508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34509 Document ! Header/Footer line
34515 \begin_inset Index idx
34518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34527 \begin_layout Standard
34528 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
34532 \begin_inset space ~
34543 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34549 \begin_inset space ~
34555 As a second step add in the menu
34557 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34558 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34567 Custom Header/Footerlines
34570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34574 This module offers the following 6
34575 \begin_inset space ~
34581 \begin_layout Description
34583 \begin_inset space ~
34587 \begin_inset space ~
34591 \begin_inset space ~
34595 \begin_inset space ~
34599 \begin_inset space ~
34605 \begin_layout Description
34607 \begin_inset space ~
34611 \begin_inset space ~
34615 \begin_inset space ~
34619 \begin_inset space ~
34623 \begin_inset space ~
34629 \begin_layout Standard
34630 for the different positions in the header/footer.
34631 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
34634 \begin_layout Standard
34635 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
34636 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
34638 \begin_inset space ~
34642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34644 reference "fig:Page-layout"
34648 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
34651 \begin_layout Standard
34652 \begin_inset Float figure
34658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34661 \begin_inset Tabular
34662 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
34663 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
34664 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34665 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34666 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34668 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
34680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34686 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34697 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34715 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34726 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
34729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34730 The normal text on the page goes here.
34731 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
34733 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
34734 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
34739 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34748 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34759 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34777 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34788 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
34800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34806 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34824 \begin_inset Caption Standard
34826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34827 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34829 name "fig:Page-layout"
34833 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
34846 \begin_layout Standard
34847 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34855 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
34859 \begin_inset space ~
34864 is set to “Default”.
34865 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
34874 \begin_layout Subsection
34878 \begin_layout Standard
34879 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
34880 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
34881 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
34882 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
34884 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
34886 Defining the footer line works similarly.
34889 \begin_layout Standard
34890 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
34891 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
34895 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34897 \begin_inset space ~
34905 \begin_layout Description
34908 thepage prints the current page number
34911 \begin_layout Description
34914 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
34917 \begin_layout Description
34920 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
34923 \begin_layout Description
34926 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
34927 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
34930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34934 \begin_inset Quotes prd
34937 because it usually goes in a left header.
34940 \begin_layout Description
34943 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
34944 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
34946 It is normally used in the right header.
34949 \begin_layout Subsection
34950 Default header/footer
34953 \begin_layout Standard
34954 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
34955 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
34956 footer has the page number.
34957 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
34958 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
34959 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
34962 \begin_inset space ~
34970 \begin_layout Subsection
34974 \begin_layout Standard
34975 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
34976 Some pages are different.
34977 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
34978 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
34979 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
34980 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
34981 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
34984 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34985 Header and footer decoration line
34988 \begin_layout Standard
34989 By default, you get a 0.4
34990 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34993 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
34994 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
35006 in the following way:
35009 \begin_layout Standard
35016 headrulewidth}{thickness}
35019 \begin_layout Standard
35020 where thickness is a size in standard units like
35033 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
35034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35040 \begin_layout Standard
35041 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35043 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
35044 \begin_inset space ~
35048 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35058 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35059 Several header/footer lines
35062 \begin_layout Standard
35063 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
35064 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
35065 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
35067 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35082 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35083 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35085 \begin_inset space ~
35093 \begin_layout Standard
35100 headheight}{height}
35103 \begin_layout Standard
35108 is a size in standard units (e.
35109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35113 \begin_inset space \space{}
35121 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
35122 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
35123 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35124 logfile with the menu
35126 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35128 \begin_inset space ~
35136 \begin_inset space ~
35141 to see if you can find a warning about the package
35146 \begin_inset Index idx
35149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35151 packages ! fancyhdr
35157 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
35158 for your header/footer.
35161 \begin_layout Subsection
35165 \begin_layout Standard
35166 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
35167 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
35168 This example consists of the following definition:
35171 \begin_layout Description
35173 \begin_inset space ~
35182 , empty optional argument
35185 \begin_layout Description
35187 \begin_inset space ~
35190 Header empty, empty optional argument
35193 \begin_layout Description
35195 \begin_inset space ~
35204 in the optional argument
35207 \begin_layout Description
35209 \begin_inset space ~
35218 in the optional argument
35221 \begin_layout Description
35223 \begin_inset space ~
35236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35240 \begin_inset Newline newline
35244 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35251 in the optional argument
35254 \begin_layout Description
35256 \begin_inset space ~
35265 , empty optional argument
35268 \begin_layout Description
35271 headrulewidth set to 2
35272 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35278 \begin_layout Standard
35279 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
35280 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
35286 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35296 \begin_layout Standard
35297 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35303 \begin_layout Standard
35307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35311 pagestyle{headings}
35317 \begin_inset Note Note
35320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35321 switches back to page style with the default headings
35329 \begin_layout Section
35330 Previewing Snippets of your Document
35331 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35333 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35338 \begin_inset Index idx
35341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35348 \begin_inset Index idx
35351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35360 \begin_layout Standard
35362 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
35363 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
35364 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
35367 \begin_layout Subsection
35371 \begin_layout Standard
35372 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35378 \begin_inset Index idx
35381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35383 packages ! preview-latex
35388 (on some systems named simply
35393 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
35395 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35402 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35404 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
35412 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
35413 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35414 -package are automatically
35415 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
35419 \begin_layout Subsection
35423 \begin_layout Standard
35424 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35425 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35427 activate the option
35430 \begin_inset space ~
35437 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35443 \begin_inset space ~
35447 \begin_inset space ~
35450 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
35457 \begin_inset space ~
35470 \begin_inset space ~
35475 is the multiplication factor for the size.
35478 \begin_layout Standard
35479 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35484 \begin_inset space ~
35492 \begin_inset space ~
35500 \begin_layout Standard
35501 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
35502 and when you finish
35506 \begin_layout Standard
35507 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35515 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
35516 generated by activating the option
35519 \begin_inset space ~
35525 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
35533 \begin_layout Subsection
35534 Selected document parts
35537 \begin_layout Standard
35538 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
35539 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
35540 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
35541 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35543 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
35545 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35549 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
35550 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
35551 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
35554 \begin_layout Standard
35555 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35562 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35574 is explained in section
35576 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
35581 \begin_inset space ~
35591 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
35592 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35593 the final rotated boxes,
35594 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
35595 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
35597 Here is the result:
35600 \begin_layout Standard
35601 \begin_inset Preview
35603 \begin_layout Standard
35608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35612 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
35618 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
35628 height_special "totalheight"
35633 backgroundcolor "none"
35636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35661 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
35667 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
35674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35689 \begin_layout Standard
35690 Previewing works also for colors.
35691 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35710 is explained in section
35717 \begin_inset space ~
35730 \begin_layout Standard
35731 \begin_inset Preview
35733 \begin_layout Standard
35737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35756 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
35761 This is text within a colored, framed box.
35765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35780 \begin_layout Standard
35781 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
35787 \begin_layout Standard
35788 If \SpecialChar LyX
35789 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
35790 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
35791 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
35792 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35793 packages in your document preamble that are required by
35794 the \SpecialChar TeX
35796 If \SpecialChar LyX
35797 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
35798 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
35800 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
35801 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
35802 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
35805 \begin_layout Subsection
35810 \begin_layout Standard
35811 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35812 source of the whole document or parts of it.
35815 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
35817 \begin_inset space ~
35822 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35824 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
35826 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
35827 's main window, then only this selection
35828 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
35829 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
35830 the source view window.
35835 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
35836 ; but note that if you have
35837 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
35839 not just the one which is open at the time.
35842 \begin_layout Section
35843 Advanced Find and Replace
35844 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35846 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35851 \begin_inset Index idx
35854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35861 \begin_inset Index idx
35864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35873 \begin_layout Subsection
35877 \begin_layout Standard
35878 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
35879 allows for searching of complex,
35880 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
35882 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
35883 The key-features are:
35886 \begin_layout Itemize
35887 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
35888 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
35889 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
35893 \begin_layout Itemize
35894 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
35895 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
35896 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
35897 a section heading will only be found within section headings
35900 \begin_layout Itemize
35901 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
35902 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
35903 outside of mathematics environments
35906 \begin_layout Itemize
35907 Search may be widened to a specific
35912 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35916 \begin_inset space ~
35919 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
35920 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
35927 \begin_layout Itemize
35928 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
35929 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
35930 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35934 \begin_inset space ~
35937 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
35940 \begin_layout Subsection
35944 \begin_layout Standard
35945 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
35947 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
35960 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
35963 ) or the toolbar button
35966 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
35972 Advanced Find and Replace
35977 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35981 \begin_layout Standard
35987 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
35991 \begin_inset space ~
35996 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
35999 arg "paragraph-break"
36003 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
36004 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
36008 arg "paragraph-break"
36011 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
36015 searches backwards.
36018 \begin_layout Standard
36022 \begin_inset space ~
36027 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
36036 \begin_inset space ~
36041 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
36044 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36045 Searching for mathematics
36048 \begin_layout Standard
36049 Mathematical formulas, such as
36050 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
36053 or something more complex like
36054 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
36057 , may be searched for by typing them in the
36062 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
36063 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
36064 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
36065 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
36071 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36075 \begin_layout Standard
36076 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
36077 This is done by switching to the
36081 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
36086 This way, entering in the
36093 \begin_layout Itemize
36094 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
36095 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
36098 \begin_layout Itemize
36099 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
36100 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
36103 \begin_layout Itemize
36104 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
36105 of it only within section headings.
36106 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
36107 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
36111 \begin_layout Itemize
36112 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
36113 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
36116 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36120 \begin_layout Standard
36121 The entries made in the
36125 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
36128 \begin_inset space ~
36134 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
36138 button or alternatively press
36141 arg "paragraph-break"
36148 while the cursor is in the
36151 \begin_inset space ~
36159 \begin_layout Standard
36160 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
36162 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
36166 \begin_layout Itemize
36167 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
36168 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
36169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36176 with its typewriter version
36177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36191 \begin_layout Itemize
36192 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
36194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36198 \begin_inset Formula $R$
36202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36210 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
36214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36217 (you may want to enable the
36220 \begin_inset space ~
36228 \begin_inset space ~
36233 options and disable the
36241 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
36242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36249 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
36250 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
36254 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
36257 , or occurrences of
36258 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
36262 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
36268 \begin_layout Subsection
36272 \begin_layout Standard
36273 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
36277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36278 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
36280 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36282 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
36292 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
36298 This is done with the context menu
36300 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36301 Insert Regular Expression
36303 while the cursor is in the
36308 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
36309 expression matching rules
36313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36314 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
36317 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36321 \begin_inset space ~
36324 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
36325 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
36331 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
36332 same text in the document.
36333 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
36334 Examples of using such a feature may be:
36337 \begin_layout Enumerate
36338 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
36343 editor the fraction
36344 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
36348 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36351 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
36352 fractions with the given denominator.
36355 \begin_layout Enumerate
36356 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
36368 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36373 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
36374 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
36375 Also, by inserting a
36376 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36379 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
36380 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
36383 \begin_layout Standard
36384 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
36385 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
36386 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36389 , and referring back to them through
36390 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36394 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
36398 For example, try searching with the regexp
36399 \begin_inset Newline newline
36402 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
36405 \begin_inset Newline newline
36408 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
36411 \begin_layout Standard
36412 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
36415 \begin_layout Standard
36416 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36424 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
36425 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
36426 sub-expressions is absolute.
36428 \begin_inset space ~
36432 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36435 always refers to the first occurrence of
36436 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36439 in all entered regexps.
36447 \begin_layout Section
36449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36451 name "sec:Spellchecking"
36456 \begin_inset Index idx
36459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36468 \begin_layout Standard
36470 has a built-in spell checker.
36473 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36480 key or the toolbar button
36483 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
36486 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
36487 beginning of the currently selected text.
36488 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
36489 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
36490 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
36491 scrolled so that it is visible.
36492 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
36493 n, if any could be found.
36494 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
36498 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
36499 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
36502 \begin_layout Standard
36503 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
36506 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36510 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
36511 a different one at the top of the dialog.
36513 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
36514 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
36517 \begin_inset space ~
36525 arg "dialog-show character"
36528 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
36530 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
36533 \begin_layout Standard
36534 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36535 can be downloaded from here:
36536 \begin_inset Newline newline
36540 \begin_inset Flex URL
36543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36545 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
36551 \begin_inset Newline newline
36555 \begin_inset space ~
36558 files for each language.
36559 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
36560 \begin_inset space ~
36563 files into \SpecialChar LyX
36564 's installation subfolder
36572 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
36574 \begin_inset Newline newline
36577 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
36578 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
36579 but in most cases these are
36595 is the language code.
36598 \begin_layout Subsection
36602 \begin_layout Standard
36605 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36606 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36608 \begin_inset space ~
36611 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36614 you can set the following things:
36617 \begin_layout Description
36619 \begin_inset space ~
36622 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
36623 should use for spell checking.
36624 Depending on your platform,
36634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36635 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
36636 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
36651 \begin_inset space ~
36654 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
36657 \begin_layout Description
36659 \begin_inset space ~
36662 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
36663 will always use the given language
36664 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
36667 \begin_layout Description
36669 \begin_inset space ~
36672 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
36674 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36678 \begin_inset space \space{}
36682 This should normally not be needed.
36685 \begin_layout Description
36687 \begin_inset space ~
36691 \begin_inset space ~
36694 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
36696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36706 \begin_layout Description
36708 \begin_inset space ~
36711 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
36712 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
36713 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
36714 appear in a context menu.
36715 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
36719 \begin_layout Description
36721 \begin_inset space ~
36725 \begin_inset space ~
36729 \begin_inset space ~
36732 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
36736 \begin_layout Section
36738 \begin_inset Index idx
36741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36748 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36750 name "sec:Thesaurus"
36757 \begin_layout Standard
36759 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
36760 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
36769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36770 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36772 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
36782 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
36784 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
36785 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
36786 which are available for many languages.
36789 \begin_layout Standard
36790 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
36791 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
36795 \begin_layout Subsection
36796 Setting up the thesaurus
36799 \begin_layout Standard
36808 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
36812 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
36817 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
36819 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36823 \begin_inset space ~
36831 For instance, the US English files are named:
36834 \begin_layout Itemize
36838 \begin_layout Itemize
36842 \begin_layout Standard
36851 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
36852 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
36855 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36856 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36857 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36859 \begin_inset space ~
36864 ) to the path where they are installed.
36868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36869 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
36870 ies, typical locations are
36876 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
36880 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
36884 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
36887 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
36893 LibreOffice-<Version>
36900 On the Mac, the default location is
36902 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
36903 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
36904 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
36905 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
36906 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
36907 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
36915 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
36916 during the \SpecialChar LyX
36917 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
36921 \begin_layout Standard
36922 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
36923 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
36925 \begin_inset Newline newline
36929 \begin_inset Flex URL
36932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36934 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
36942 \begin_layout Standard
36943 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
36944 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
36946 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36947 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36948 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36950 \begin_inset space ~
36955 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
36957 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
36958 and point \SpecialChar LyX
36962 \begin_layout Standard
36963 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
36965 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
36968 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
36974 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
36977 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
36978 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
36980 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36986 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36987 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36988 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36990 \begin_inset space ~
36995 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
36998 \begin_layout Subsection
36999 Using the thesaurus
37002 \begin_layout Standard
37003 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
37005 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37008 or the toolbar button
37011 arg "thesaurus-entry"
37014 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
37016 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
37018 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
37019 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
37020 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
37029 ), related terms (such as
37032 \begin_inset space ~
37041 ), compounds (such as
37044 \begin_inset space ~
37053 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
37062 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
37065 \begin_layout Standard
37066 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
37067 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
37071 \begin_layout Standard
37072 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
37073 the dictionary, such as the above
37077 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
37078 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37082 \begin_inset space \space{}
37085 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
37086 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
37087 For example, looking up the word form
37091 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
37096 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
37097 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37101 \begin_inset space \space{}
37112 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
37113 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
37114 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
37117 \begin_layout Section
37119 \begin_inset Index idx
37122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37129 \begin_inset Index idx
37132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37133 Document ! Change Tracking
37139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37141 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
37148 \begin_layout Standard
37149 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
37150 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
37151 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
37152 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
37154 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37156 \begin_inset space ~
37159 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37161 \begin_inset space ~
37169 \begin_layout Standard
37170 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
37184 The color depends on the author that made the change.
37185 You can change the color in
37187 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37188 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37190 \begin_inset space ~
37194 \begin_inset space ~
37199 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37205 \begin_inset Index idx
37208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37209 Color ! Change tracking
37214 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
37215 's status bar when the
37216 cursor is in changed text.
37217 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
37220 arg "changes-merge"
37226 \begin_layout Standard
37227 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
37229 \begin_inset Index idx
37232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37241 \begin_layout Standard
37242 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37248 \begin_layout Standard
37249 \begin_inset Graphics
37250 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
37258 \begin_layout Standard
37259 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37265 \begin_layout Standard
37266 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
37269 \begin_layout Standard
37270 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37276 \begin_layout Standard
37277 \begin_inset Tabular
37278 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
37279 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37280 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37281 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37282 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37291 arg "changes-track"
37299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37305 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37307 \begin_inset space ~
37310 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37312 \begin_inset space ~
37321 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37330 arg "changes-output"
37338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37344 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37346 \begin_inset space ~
37349 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37351 \begin_inset space ~
37355 \begin_inset space ~
37359 \begin_inset space ~
37368 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37389 Jumps to the next change
37395 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37404 arg "change-accept"
37412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37418 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37420 \begin_inset space ~
37423 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37425 \begin_inset space ~
37434 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37443 arg "change-reject"
37451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37457 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37459 \begin_inset space ~
37462 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37464 \begin_inset space ~
37473 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37482 arg "changes-merge"
37490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37496 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37498 \begin_inset space ~
37501 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37503 \begin_inset space ~
37512 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37521 arg "all-changes-accept"
37529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37535 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37537 \begin_inset space ~
37540 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37542 \begin_inset space ~
37546 \begin_inset space ~
37555 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37564 arg "all-changes-reject"
37572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37578 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37580 \begin_inset space ~
37583 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37585 \begin_inset space ~
37589 \begin_inset space ~
37598 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37621 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37622 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
37624 \begin_inset space ~
37633 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37656 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
37658 \begin_inset space ~
37674 \begin_layout Standard
37675 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37681 \begin_layout Standard
37682 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
37702 \begin_layout Standard
37703 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
37704 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
37705 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
37706 the next change after the current cursor position.
37707 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
37708 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
37709 step to the next change.
37710 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
37713 \begin_layout Standard
37714 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
37715 to describe a change.
37718 \begin_layout Standard
37719 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37725 \begin_inset Index idx
37728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37736 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
37738 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37745 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37749 \begin_layout Section
37750 Comparison of Documents
37751 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37753 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37758 \begin_inset Index idx
37761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37762 Comparison of documents
37770 \begin_layout Standard
37771 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
37774 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37778 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
37779 file with change tracking enabled showing the
37781 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
37783 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
37787 \begin_inset space ~
37791 \begin_inset space ~
37795 \begin_inset space ~
37804 \begin_inset space ~
37808 \begin_inset space ~
37812 \begin_inset space ~
37816 \begin_inset space ~
37820 \begin_inset space ~
37824 \begin_inset space ~
37829 enables the change tracking option
37832 \begin_inset space ~
37836 \begin_inset space ~
37840 \begin_inset space ~
37845 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
37848 \begin_layout Section
37849 International Support
37850 \begin_inset Index idx
37853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37854 International support
37862 \begin_layout Standard
37863 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
37864 with any language you want.
37865 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
37866 up \SpecialChar LyX
37868 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37870 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
37878 \begin_layout Standard
37879 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
37880 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
37881 \begin_inset space ~
37885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37887 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
37894 \begin_layout Subsection
37896 \begin_inset Index idx
37899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37906 \begin_inset Index idx
37909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37910 Document ! Settings
37916 \begin_inset Index idx
37919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37920 Document ! Language
37928 \begin_layout Standard
37931 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37932 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37935 dialog lets you set
37937 the language, the quote style and character encoding
37942 \begin_layout Standard
37947 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37952 \begin_inset space ~
37957 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
37958 For details about the different encoding options see section
37959 \begin_inset space ~
37963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37965 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
37972 \begin_layout Subsection
37973 Keyboard mapping configuration
37974 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37976 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
37983 \begin_layout Standard
37984 If you have for example a U.
37985 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37988 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
37989 can use an alternate keymap.
37990 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
37995 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37996 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37997 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
38000 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
38001 \begin_inset space ~
38005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38007 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
38012 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
38013 which one you want to use.
38016 \begin_layout Standard
38017 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
38018 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
38019 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
38020 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38023 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
38024 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
38025 one to support the characters you want.
38026 This and many other customizations are explained in the
38033 \begin_layout Chapter
38036 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38038 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
38045 \begin_layout Standard
38046 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
38047 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
38048 topic inside the user's guide.
38051 \begin_layout Section
38053 \begin_inset Index idx
38056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38065 \begin_layout Standard
38070 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
38073 \begin_layout Subsection
38077 \begin_layout Standard
38078 Creates a new document.
38081 \begin_layout Subsection
38085 \begin_layout Standard
38086 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
38087 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
38088 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
38091 \begin_layout Subsection
38095 \begin_layout Standard
38099 \begin_layout Subsection
38103 \begin_layout Standard
38104 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
38105 Click there on a file to open it.
38108 \begin_layout Subsection
38112 \begin_layout Standard
38113 Closes the current document.
38116 \begin_layout Subsection
38120 \begin_layout Standard
38121 Closes all opened documents.
38124 \begin_layout Subsection
38128 \begin_layout Standard
38129 Saves the actual document.
38132 \begin_layout Subsection
38136 \begin_layout Standard
38137 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
38140 \begin_layout Subsection
38144 \begin_layout Standard
38145 Saves all opened documents.
38148 \begin_layout Subsection
38152 \begin_layout Standard
38153 Reloads the actual document from disk.
38156 \begin_layout Subsection
38160 \begin_layout Standard
38161 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
38162 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
38163 It is described in the section
38165 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
38170 Additional Features
38175 \begin_layout Subsection
38179 \begin_layout Standard
38180 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
38181 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
38183 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
38184 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
38188 \begin_layout Standard
38189 When using the menu entry
38192 \begin_inset space ~
38197 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
38201 \begin_inset space ~
38205 \begin_inset space ~
38209 \begin_inset space ~
38214 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
38215 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
38218 \begin_layout Subsection
38220 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38222 name "subsec:Export"
38229 \begin_layout Standard
38230 You can export your document to various file formats.
38231 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
38233 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
38234 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
38235 during its configuration.
38238 \begin_layout Standard
38239 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
38241 \begin_inset space ~
38245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38247 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
38254 \begin_layout Description
38260 \begin_inset space ~
38263 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
38265 \begin_inset space ~
38268 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
38269 \begin_inset Newline newline
38272 Since \SpecialChar LyX
38273 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
38277 \begin_layout Description
38278 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
38284 \begin_layout Description
38286 \begin_inset space ~
38289 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
38295 \begin_layout Description
38296 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
38297 's native DVI-format.
38298 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
38299 files paths or file names in your document.
38301 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
38308 \begin_layout Description
38309 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
38310 in files paths or file names
38313 \begin_layout Description
38315 \begin_inset space ~
38322 ) DVI-format using the program
38324 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38327 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
38331 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38339 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
38347 \begin_layout Description
38349 \begin_inset space ~
38352 (cropped) the same as
38356 but with cropped page margins.
38359 \begin_layout Description
38361 \begin_inset space ~
38364 Dot text file with code in the programming language
38368 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
38373 \begin_layout Description
38377 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38385 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
38393 \begin_layout Description
38395 \begin_inset space ~
38399 \begin_inset space ~
38402 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
38406 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
38414 \begin_layout Description
38418 \begin_inset space ~
38427 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38428 source that is compilable with the program
38430 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38434 \begin_layout Description
38438 \begin_inset space ~
38443 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38444 source, additionally all images used in the document
38445 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
38449 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
38452 \begin_layout Description
38456 \begin_inset space ~
38461 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38462 source code, additionally all images used in the document
38463 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
38471 \begin_layout Description
38475 \begin_inset space ~
38484 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38485 source that is compilable with the program
38491 \begin_layout Description
38493 \begin_inset space ~
38497 \begin_inset space ~
38504 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38505 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
38511 \begin_layout Description
38513 \begin_inset space ~
38516 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
38517 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
38519 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38523 \begin_inset space \space{}
38528 \begin_inset space ~
38532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38547 represent the version number)
38550 \begin_layout Description
38552 \begin_inset space ~
38556 \begin_inset space ~
38559 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
38560 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
38561 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
38565 \begin_layout Description
38566 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
38567 's internal XHTML engine
38570 \begin_layout Description
38572 \begin_inset space ~
38576 \begin_inset space ~
38580 \begin_inset space ~
38584 \begin_inset space ~
38587 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
38592 For the conversion the program
38601 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38604 \begin_layout Description
38605 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
38610 \begin_layout Description
38612 \begin_inset space ~
38615 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
38617 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
38620 For the conversion the program
38629 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38632 \begin_layout Description
38634 \begin_inset space ~
38637 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
38638 For the conversion the program
38647 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38650 \begin_layout Description
38652 \begin_inset space ~
38655 (cropped) the same as
38658 \begin_inset space ~
38663 but with cropped page margins
38666 \begin_layout Description
38670 \begin_inset space ~
38675 PDF-format using the program
38679 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
38682 \begin_layout Description
38686 \begin_inset space ~
38690 \begin_inset space ~
38698 \begin_inset space ~
38703 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
38704 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38708 \begin_inset space \space{}
38711 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
38715 \begin_layout Description
38719 \begin_inset space ~
38724 PDF-format using the program
38726 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38729 , produces PDF-files directly
38732 \begin_layout Description
38736 \begin_inset space ~
38741 PDF-format using the program
38745 , produces PDF-files directly
38748 \begin_layout Description
38752 \begin_inset space ~
38757 PDF-format using the program
38761 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
38764 \begin_layout Description
38768 \begin_inset space ~
38773 PDF-format using the program
38778 , produces PDF-files directly
38781 \begin_layout Description
38785 \begin_inset space ~
38793 \begin_layout Description
38797 \begin_inset space ~
38801 \begin_inset space ~
38806 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
38807 and then exported as text using the program
38812 \begin_layout Description
38817 PostScript format using the program
38825 options see section
38826 \begin_inset space ~
38830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38832 reference "subsec:General-output"
38839 \begin_layout Description
38840 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38841 source and also code in the statistical programming
38855 it is possible to use
38859 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
38863 \begin_layout Standard
38864 If one of the menu entries
38871 \begin_inset space ~
38880 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38882 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
38884 \begin_inset space ~
38888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38890 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38895 \begin_inset Index idx
38898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38899 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38908 \begin_layout Subsection
38912 \begin_layout Standard
38913 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
38914 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
38917 \begin_inset space ~
38921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38923 reference "sec:Paths"
38928 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
38937 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
38938 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
38939 's preferences as described in section
38940 \begin_inset space ~
38944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38946 reference "subsec:Converters"
38953 \begin_layout Subsection
38954 New and Close Window
38957 \begin_layout Standard
38958 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
38962 \begin_layout Subsection
38966 \begin_layout Standard
38967 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
38970 \begin_layout Section
38972 \begin_inset Index idx
38975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38984 \begin_layout Subsection
38988 \begin_layout Standard
38989 Described in section
38990 \begin_inset space ~
38994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38996 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
39003 \begin_layout Subsection
39004 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
39007 \begin_layout Standard
39008 Described in section
39009 \begin_inset space ~
39013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39015 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39022 \begin_layout Subsection
39026 \begin_layout Standard
39027 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
39028 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
39031 \begin_layout Subsection
39035 \begin_layout Standard
39036 Selects the whole document.
39039 \begin_layout Subsection
39040 Find & Replace (Quick)
39043 \begin_layout Standard
39044 Described in section
39045 \begin_inset space ~
39049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39051 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39058 \begin_layout Subsection
39059 Find & Replace (Advanced)
39062 \begin_layout Standard
39063 Described in section
39064 \begin_inset space ~
39068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39070 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
39077 \begin_layout Subsection
39078 Move Paragraph Up/Down
39081 \begin_layout Standard
39082 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
39086 \begin_layout Subsection
39090 \begin_layout Standard
39092 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595818
39093 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
39098 \begin_layout Enumerate
39100 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595876
39101 Customize text properties by means of the
39107 Customized\SpecialChar ldots
39111 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595580
39113 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595580
39116 escribed in section
39117 \begin_inset space ~
39121 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39123 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39128 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595582
39130 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595616
39132 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595617
39136 \begin_layout Enumerate
39138 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595704
39139 Change the casing of selected text (
39154 \begin_layout Enumerate
39156 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599421
39157 Select custom character styles if provided by the document class or a module
39158 (in the case of this document:
39175 \begin_inset space ~
39179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39181 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
39190 \begin_layout Subsection
39192 \begin_inset Index idx
39195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39196 Paragraph ! Settings
39204 \begin_layout Standard
39205 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
39206 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
39210 \begin_layout Standard
39211 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
39212 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
39218 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39219 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39221 \begin_inset space ~
39229 \begin_layout Subsection
39230 Table and Rows & Columns
39233 \begin_layout Standard
39234 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
39235 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
39236 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
39239 \begin_layout Subsection
39243 \begin_layout Standard
39244 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
39245 It will dissolve this inset.
39246 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
39250 \begin_layout Subsection
39254 \begin_layout Standard
39255 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
39256 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
39259 \begin_layout Subsection
39260 Increase/Decrease List Depth
39263 \begin_layout Standard
39264 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
39266 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
39267 \begin_inset space ~
39271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39273 reference "sec:Nesting"
39278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39280 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
39287 \begin_layout Section
39289 \begin_inset Index idx
39292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39301 \begin_layout Standard
39302 At the bottom of the
39306 menu the opened documents are listed.
39309 \begin_layout Subsection
39310 Open/Close all Insets
39313 \begin_layout Standard
39314 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
39317 \begin_layout Subsection
39318 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
39321 \begin_layout Standard
39322 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
39325 \begin_layout Standard
39326 Math macros are described in the
39333 \begin_layout Subsection
39337 \begin_layout Standard
39338 Shows the outline window as described in sections
39339 \begin_inset space ~
39343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39345 reference "sec:Navigating"
39350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39352 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
39359 \begin_layout Subsection
39363 \begin_layout Standard
39364 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
39366 \begin_inset space ~
39370 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39372 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39379 \begin_layout Subsection
39383 \begin_layout Standard
39384 Opens a window showing console messages.
39385 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
39387 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39390 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
39391 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
39392 is processing the document.
39395 \begin_layout Subsection
39397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39399 name "subsec:Toolbars"
39404 \begin_inset Index idx
39407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39416 \begin_layout Standard
39417 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
39419 All toolbars and the
39422 \begin_inset space ~
39427 can be turned on and off.
39432 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
39444 \begin_inset space ~
39456 \begin_inset space ~
39461 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
39465 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
39472 \begin_layout Standard
39477 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
39481 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
39482 or when a certain feature is enabled.
39483 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
39484 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
39485 is inside a formula or table respectively.
39488 \begin_layout Standard
39490 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
39491 \begin_inset space ~
39495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39497 reference "sec:Toolbars"
39504 \begin_layout Subsection
39508 \begin_layout Standard
39512 \begin_inset space ~
39516 \begin_inset space ~
39520 \begin_inset space ~
39524 \begin_inset space ~
39528 \begin_inset space ~
39532 \begin_inset space ~
39537 will split \SpecialChar LyX
39538 's main window vertically while
39541 \begin_inset space ~
39545 \begin_inset space ~
39549 \begin_inset space ~
39553 \begin_inset space ~
39557 \begin_inset space ~
39561 \begin_inset space ~
39566 will split it horizontally.
39567 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
39568 to view the same document, but at different positions.
39569 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
39570 three or more documents at the same time.
39571 To close a split view, use the menu
39574 \begin_inset space ~
39578 \begin_inset space ~
39586 \begin_layout Subsection
39590 \begin_layout Standard
39591 Closes a split view.
39594 \begin_layout Subsection
39598 \begin_layout Standard
39599 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
39600 so that you will see nothing but your text.
39601 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
39602 's main window fullscreen.
39603 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
39604 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
39607 \begin_layout Section
39609 \begin_inset Index idx
39612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39621 \begin_layout Subsection
39625 \begin_layout Standard
39626 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
39627 \begin_inset space ~
39631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39633 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
39644 \begin_layout Subsection
39646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39648 name "subsec:Special-Character"
39655 \begin_layout Standard
39656 Here you can insert the following characters:
39659 \begin_layout Description
39664 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
39667 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
39668 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39669 -packages you have installed.
39670 You can get a complete display by checking
39673 \begin_inset space ~
39679 \begin_inset Newline newline
39683 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39691 Not all characters will be visible in the
39695 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
39696 dialog (see section
39697 \begin_inset space ~
39701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39703 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
39707 ) can display every character.
39715 \begin_layout Description
39716 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
39720 \begin_layout Description
39722 \begin_inset space ~
39726 \begin_inset space ~
39729 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
39730 \begin_inset space ~
39734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39736 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
39743 \begin_layout Description
39745 \begin_inset space ~
39748 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
39751 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39752 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39758 \begin_layout Description
39760 \begin_inset space ~
39763 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
39766 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39767 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39773 \begin_layout Description
39775 \begin_inset space ~
39778 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
39782 \begin_layout Description
39784 \begin_inset space ~
39787 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
39791 \begin_layout Description
39793 \begin_inset space ~
39796 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
39802 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
39808 \begin_layout Description
39810 \begin_inset space ~
39813 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
39817 \begin_layout Description
39819 \begin_inset space ~
39823 \begin_inset Index idx
39826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39833 \begin_inset Index idx
39836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39837 Language ! Phonetic symbols
39842 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
39843 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
39845 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39851 \begin_inset Index idx
39854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39862 \begin_inset Newline newline
39865 More information about this feature can be found in the
39871 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
39877 \begin_layout Description
39878 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
39880 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
39881 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
39885 \begin_layout Subsection
39889 \begin_layout Standard
39890 Opens a submenu with the following options:
39893 \begin_layout Description
39894 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
39895 \begin_inset script superscript
39897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39906 \begin_layout Description
39907 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
39908 \begin_inset script subscript
39910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39919 \begin_layout Description
39921 \begin_inset space ~
39924 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
39925 \begin_inset space ~
39929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39931 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
39938 \begin_layout Description
39940 \begin_inset space ~
39943 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
39944 \begin_inset space ~
39948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39950 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
39957 \begin_layout Description
39959 \begin_inset space ~
39962 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
39963 \begin_inset space ~
39967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39969 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
39976 \begin_layout Description
39978 \begin_inset space ~
39981 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
39983 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39987 \begin_inset space \space{}
39990 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
39991 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
39997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40000 To insert a fraction use the command
40005 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40009 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40018 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40025 \begin_layout Description
40027 \begin_inset space ~
40030 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
40031 \begin_inset space ~
40035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40037 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
40044 \begin_layout Description
40046 \begin_inset space ~
40049 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
40050 \begin_inset space ~
40054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40056 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
40063 \begin_layout Description
40065 \begin_inset space ~
40068 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
40069 \begin_inset space ~
40073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40075 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
40082 \begin_layout Description
40083 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
40084 \begin_inset space ~
40088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40090 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
40097 \begin_layout Description
40099 \begin_inset space ~
40102 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
40103 \begin_inset space ~
40107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40109 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
40116 \begin_layout Description
40118 \begin_inset space ~
40121 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
40122 \begin_inset space ~
40126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40128 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
40135 \begin_layout Description
40137 \begin_inset space ~
40141 \begin_inset space ~
40144 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
40147 \begin_inset space ~
40151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40153 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
40160 for a usage example.
40163 \begin_layout Description
40165 \begin_inset space ~
40169 \begin_inset space ~
40172 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
40173 \begin_inset space ~
40177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40179 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40186 \begin_layout Description
40188 \begin_inset space ~
40191 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
40192 as described in section
40193 \begin_inset space ~
40197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40199 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40206 \begin_layout Description
40208 \begin_inset space ~
40211 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
40212 \begin_inset space ~
40216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40218 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40225 \begin_layout Description
40227 \begin_inset space ~
40230 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
40231 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
40233 \begin_inset space ~
40237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40239 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40246 \begin_layout Description
40248 \begin_inset space ~
40251 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
40252 \begin_inset space ~
40256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40258 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40265 \begin_layout Description
40267 \begin_inset space ~
40271 \begin_inset space ~
40274 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
40275 \begin_inset space ~
40279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40281 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40288 \begin_layout Subsection
40292 \begin_layout Standard
40293 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
40297 \begin_inset space ~
40318 are described in section
40319 \begin_inset space ~
40323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40325 reference "sec:toc"
40334 is described in section
40335 \begin_inset space ~
40339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40341 reference "sec:Index"
40349 is described in section
40350 \begin_inset space ~
40354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40356 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
40362 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40365 is described in section
40366 \begin_inset space ~
40370 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40372 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
40379 \begin_layout Subsection
40383 \begin_layout Standard
40384 To insert floats, as described in section
40385 \begin_inset space ~
40389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40391 reference "sec:Floats"
40395 and in detail the chapter
40402 \begin_inset space ~
40410 \begin_layout Subsection
40414 \begin_layout Standard
40415 To insert notes, described in section
40416 \begin_inset space ~
40420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40422 reference "sec:Notes"
40429 \begin_layout Subsection
40433 \begin_layout Standard
40434 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
40436 Branches are described in section
40437 \begin_inset space ~
40441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40443 reference "sec:Branches"
40450 \begin_layout Subsection
40454 \begin_layout Standard
40455 Inserts document class-specific insets.
40456 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
40458 An example is the document class
40459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40466 with three custom insets.
40469 Flex insets and InsetLayout
40473 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
40479 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
40482 \begin_layout Subsection
40484 \begin_inset Index idx
40487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40496 \begin_layout Standard
40497 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
40499 For more information see chapter
40501 External Document Parts
40504 \begin_inset space ~
40510 \begin_layout Subsection
40512 \begin_inset Index idx
40515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40524 \begin_layout Standard
40525 Inserts a box in a certain style.
40526 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
40533 \begin_inset space ~
40541 \begin_layout Subsection
40545 \begin_layout Standard
40550 dialog as described in section
40551 \begin_inset space ~
40555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40557 reference "sec:Bibliography"
40564 \begin_layout Subsection
40568 \begin_layout Standard
40573 as described in section
40574 \begin_inset space ~
40578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40580 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40587 \begin_layout Subsection
40591 \begin_layout Standard
40596 as described in section
40597 \begin_inset space ~
40601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40603 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40610 \begin_layout Subsection
40612 \begin_inset Index idx
40615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40622 \begin_inset Index idx
40625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40626 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
40634 \begin_layout Standard
40635 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
40636 Floats are described in section
40637 \begin_inset space ~
40641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40643 reference "sec:Floats"
40647 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
40649 Multi-page Captions
40654 \begin_inset space ~
40662 \begin_layout Subsection
40666 \begin_layout Standard
40667 Inserts an index entry as described in section
40668 \begin_inset space ~
40672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40674 reference "sec:Index"
40681 \begin_layout Subsection
40685 \begin_layout Standard
40686 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
40687 \begin_inset space ~
40691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40693 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
40700 \begin_layout Subsection
40704 \begin_layout Standard
40705 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
40706 Tables are described in section
40707 \begin_inset space ~
40711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40713 reference "sec:Tables"
40717 and in detail in the chapter
40724 \begin_inset space ~
40732 \begin_layout Subsection
40736 \begin_layout Standard
40742 Graphics are described in section
40743 \begin_inset space ~
40747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40749 reference "sec:Graphics"
40756 \begin_layout Subsection
40760 \begin_layout Standard
40761 Inserts a URL as described in section
40762 \begin_inset space ~
40766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40768 reference "subsec:URLs"
40775 \begin_layout Subsection
40779 \begin_layout Standard
40780 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
40781 \begin_inset space ~
40785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40787 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
40794 \begin_layout Subsection
40798 \begin_layout Standard
40799 Inserts a footnote as described in section
40800 \begin_inset space ~
40804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40806 reference "sec:Footnotes"
40813 \begin_layout Subsection
40817 \begin_layout Standard
40818 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
40819 \begin_inset space ~
40823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40825 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
40832 \begin_layout Subsection
40835 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
40838 \begin_layout Standard
40839 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
40840 environments of the same type.
40842 \begin_inset space ~
40846 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40848 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
40852 for an explanation.
40855 \begin_layout Subsection
40859 \begin_layout Standard
40860 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
40861 title or caption of a float.
40862 Inserts a short title as described in section
40863 \begin_inset space ~
40867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40869 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
40876 \begin_layout Subsection
40881 \begin_layout Standard
40882 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
40883 Code box as described in section
40884 \begin_inset space ~
40888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40890 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
40897 \begin_layout Subsection
40899 \begin_inset Index idx
40902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40911 \begin_layout Standard
40912 Inserts a program listings box.
40913 Program listings are explained in the chapter
40915 Program Code Listings
40920 \begin_inset space ~
40928 \begin_layout Subsection
40932 \begin_layout Standard
40933 Inserts the actual date.
40934 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
40939 \begin_layout Subsection
40943 \begin_layout Standard
40944 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
40945 \begin_inset space ~
40949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40951 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
40958 \begin_layout Section
40960 \begin_inset Index idx
40963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40972 \begin_layout Standard
40973 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
40974 \begin_inset space ~
40977 of the current document.
40978 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
40981 \begin_layout Subsection
40985 \begin_layout Standard
40986 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
40987 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
40988 to jump, for example, between section
40989 \begin_inset space ~
40993 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
40994 \begin_inset space ~
40997 2.5 and use the submenu
41000 \begin_inset space ~
41004 \begin_inset space ~
41011 \begin_inset space ~
41017 \begin_inset space ~
41021 \begin_inset space ~
41027 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
41031 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
41037 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
41040 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
41043 \begin_layout Standard
41044 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
41048 \begin_inset space ~
41053 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
41056 \begin_inset space ~
41061 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
41064 \begin_layout Subsection
41065 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
41068 \begin_layout Standard
41069 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
41073 \begin_layout Subsection
41077 \begin_layout Standard
41078 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
41079 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
41080 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
41084 \begin_inset space ~
41088 \begin_inset space ~
41096 \begin_layout Subsection
41100 \begin_layout Standard
41101 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
41104 The \SpecialChar LyX
41105 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
41107 \begin_inset space ~
41115 \begin_inset space ~
41120 manual for a detailed description.
41123 \begin_layout Section
41125 \begin_inset Index idx
41128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41137 \begin_layout Subsection
41141 \begin_layout Standard
41142 Change Tracking is described in section
41143 \begin_inset space ~
41147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41149 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
41156 \begin_layout Subsection
41164 \begin_layout Standard
41165 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
41166 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
41167 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41169 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
41170 to the clipboard or update the view.
41171 \begin_inset Newline newline
41174 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41178 \begin_layout Standard
41181 Open Containing Directory
41183 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
41184 's temporary folder for the document.
41185 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
41186 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
41187 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
41188 For example some journals require to send the
41192 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41196 \begin_layout Subsection
41197 Start Appendix Here
41200 \begin_layout Standard
41201 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
41202 as described in section
41203 \begin_inset space ~
41207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41209 reference "sec:Appendices"
41216 \begin_layout Subsection
41218 \begin_inset space ~
41224 \begin_layout Standard
41225 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
41226 default output format for the document (menu
41228 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41229 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41230 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41232 \begin_inset space ~
41236 \begin_inset space ~
41242 \begin_inset space ~
41246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41248 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41252 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
41255 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41256 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41258 \begin_inset space ~
41261 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41263 \begin_inset space ~
41266 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41268 \begin_inset space ~
41272 \begin_inset space ~
41278 \begin_inset space ~
41282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41284 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41288 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
41289 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
41291 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41292 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41294 \begin_inset space ~
41297 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41299 \begin_inset space ~
41302 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41306 \begin_inset space ~
41310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41312 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41317 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
41318 when it is first configured.
41319 The default output format is
41322 \begin_inset space ~
41330 \begin_layout Subsection
41331 View (Other Formats)
41334 \begin_layout Standard
41335 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
41336 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
41337 actual document with an external program.
41338 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
41339 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41340 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
41342 All possible formats are listed in section
41343 \begin_inset space ~
41347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41349 reference "subsec:Export"
41354 You should at least see the menu entry
41359 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41361 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
41363 \begin_inset space ~
41367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41369 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
41374 \begin_inset Index idx
41377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41378 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
41387 \begin_layout Standard
41388 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
41389 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
41391 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41392 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41394 \begin_inset space ~
41397 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41399 \begin_inset space ~
41402 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41406 \begin_inset space ~
41410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41412 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41417 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
41418 when it is first configured.
41421 \begin_layout Subsection
41423 \begin_inset space ~
41429 \begin_layout Standard
41430 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
41431 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
41434 \begin_layout Subsection
41435 Update (Other Formats)
41438 \begin_layout Standard
41439 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
41440 your document without opening a new viewer window.
41443 \begin_layout Subsection
41444 View Master Document
41447 \begin_layout Standard
41448 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
41450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41464 \begin_inset space ~
41469 manual for more information on this topic).
41470 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
41471 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
41475 \begin_inset space ~
41479 \begin_inset space ~
41484 generates the output of the whole book, while
41488 will just output the chapter alone.
41491 \begin_layout Standard
41492 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
41493 in the document settings (menu
41495 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41496 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41497 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41499 \begin_inset space ~
41503 \begin_inset space ~
41509 \begin_inset space ~
41513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41515 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41519 ) or in the preferences (menu
41521 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41522 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41524 \begin_inset space ~
41527 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41529 \begin_inset space ~
41532 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41534 \begin_inset space ~
41538 \begin_inset space ~
41544 \begin_inset space ~
41548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41550 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41557 \begin_layout Subsection
41558 Update Master Document
41561 \begin_layout Standard
41562 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
41564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41578 \begin_inset space ~
41583 manual for more information on this topic).
41584 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
41585 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
41588 \begin_layout Standard
41589 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
41590 in the document settings (menu
41592 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41593 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41594 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41596 \begin_inset space ~
41600 \begin_inset space ~
41606 \begin_inset space ~
41610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41612 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41616 ) or in the preferences (menu
41618 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41619 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41621 \begin_inset space ~
41624 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41626 \begin_inset space ~
41629 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41631 \begin_inset space ~
41635 \begin_inset space ~
41641 \begin_inset space ~
41645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41647 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41654 \begin_layout Subsection
41656 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41658 name "subsec:Compressed"
41665 \begin_layout Standard
41666 Un/compresses the current document.
41667 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
41668 compression (see the
41670 Additional Features
41672 manual for details).
41675 \begin_layout Subsection
41679 \begin_layout Standard
41680 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
41683 \begin_layout Subsection
41687 \begin_layout Standard
41688 The document settings are described in appendix
41689 \begin_inset space ~
41693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41695 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
41702 \begin_layout Section
41704 \begin_inset Index idx
41707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41716 \begin_layout Subsection
41720 \begin_layout Standard
41721 Spell checking is explained in section
41722 \begin_inset space ~
41726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41728 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
41735 \begin_layout Subsection
41739 \begin_layout Standard
41740 The thesaurus is described in section
41741 \begin_inset space ~
41745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41747 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
41754 \begin_layout Subsection
41756 \begin_inset Index idx
41759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41766 \begin_inset Index idx
41769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41778 \begin_layout Standard
41779 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
41780 the highlighted document part.
41783 \begin_layout Subsection
41789 \begin_inset Index idx
41792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41793 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
41802 \begin_layout Standard
41803 Generates with the help of the program
41805 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
41808 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
41809 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
41810 This feature is not available on Windows.
41813 \begin_layout Subsection
41819 \begin_inset Index idx
41822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41832 \begin_layout Standard
41833 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41838 \begin_inset space ~
41843 to see the full filename paths.
41846 \begin_layout Subsection
41848 \begin_inset Index idx
41851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41860 \begin_layout Standard
41861 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
41862 files as described in section
41863 \begin_inset space ~
41867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41869 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
41876 \begin_layout Subsection
41878 \begin_inset Index idx
41881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41894 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
41899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41912 \begin_inset Index idx
41915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41916 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
41925 \begin_layout Standard
41926 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
41927 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
41928 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41929 -packages and programs it needs; see
41931 \begin_inset space ~
41935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41937 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
41944 \begin_layout Subsection
41948 \begin_layout Standard
41953 dialog as described in detail in appendix
41954 \begin_inset space ~
41958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41960 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
41967 \begin_layout Section
41969 \begin_inset Index idx
41972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41981 \begin_layout Standard
41982 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
41983 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
41985 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
41989 \begin_layout Standard
41993 \begin_inset space ~
41998 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
41999 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42000 packages and classes found
42001 by \SpecialChar LyX
42003 \begin_inset space ~
42007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42009 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
42016 \begin_layout Standard
42020 \begin_inset space ~
42025 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
42030 \begin_layout Section
42032 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42034 name "sec:Toolbars"
42041 \begin_layout Standard
42042 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
42043 \begin_inset space ~
42047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42049 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
42056 \begin_layout Standard
42057 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
42058 This is described in the
42060 Additional Features
42065 \begin_layout Subsection
42067 \begin_inset Index idx
42070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42079 \begin_layout Standard
42080 \begin_inset Graphics
42081 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
42089 \begin_layout Standard
42090 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42096 \begin_layout Standard
42097 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42114 \begin_inset Note Note
42117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42118 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
42123 manual for more information.
42131 \begin_layout Standard
42132 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42138 \begin_layout Standard
42139 \begin_inset Tabular
42140 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
42141 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42142 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42143 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42149 \begin_inset Graphics
42150 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
42160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42164 pull-down box for the environments
42177 \begin_layout Standard
42178 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
42184 \begin_layout Standard
42186 \begin_inset Tabular
42187 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
42188 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42189 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42190 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42191 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42214 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42221 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42244 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42251 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42274 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42281 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42290 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
42298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42304 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42311 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42320 arg "spelling-continuously"
42328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42332 Spellcheck continuously
42338 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42361 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42368 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42391 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42398 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42421 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42428 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42451 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42458 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42481 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42488 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42497 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
42505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42511 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42517 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42521 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42530 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42537 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
42545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42551 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42553 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42557 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42561 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42570 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42579 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
42587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42593 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42594 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
42601 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42622 Emphasize text, function of the
42624 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42626 \begin_inset space ~
42629 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42638 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42659 Set text to noun style, function of the
42661 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42663 \begin_inset space ~
42666 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42675 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42684 arg "textstyle-apply"
42692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42696 Format text using the current settings in the
42698 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42700 \begin_inset space ~
42703 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42712 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42735 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42736 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42738 \begin_inset space ~
42747 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42756 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
42764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42770 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42777 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42784 arg "tabular-insert"
42792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42798 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42805 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42814 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
42822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42826 Toggle outline window on/off,
42828 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
42835 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42844 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
42852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42856 Toggle math toolbar on/off
42862 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42871 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
42879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42883 Toggle table toolbar on/off
42896 \begin_layout Subsection
42898 \begin_inset Index idx
42901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42910 \begin_layout Standard
42911 \begin_inset Graphics
42912 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
42920 \begin_layout Standard
42921 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42927 \begin_layout Standard
42928 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42932 \begin_layout Standard
42933 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42939 \begin_layout Standard
42940 \begin_inset Tabular
42941 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
42942 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42943 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42944 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42945 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42972 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42981 arg "layout Enumerate"
42989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42999 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43008 arg "layout Itemize"
43016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43026 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43053 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43062 arg "layout Description"
43070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43080 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43089 arg "depth-increment"
43097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43103 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43105 \begin_inset space ~
43109 \begin_inset space ~
43118 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43127 arg "depth-decrement"
43135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43141 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43143 \begin_inset space ~
43147 \begin_inset space ~
43156 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43165 arg "float-insert figure"
43173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43179 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43180 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
43187 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43196 arg "float-insert table"
43204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43210 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43211 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
43218 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43241 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43248 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43257 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
43265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43271 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43278 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43287 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
43295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43301 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43308 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43331 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43333 \begin_inset space ~
43342 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43351 arg "nomencl-insert"
43359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43365 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43367 \begin_inset space ~
43376 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43385 arg "footnote-insert"
43393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43399 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43406 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43415 arg "marginalnote-insert"
43423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43429 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43431 \begin_inset space ~
43440 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43463 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43464 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
43466 \begin_inset space ~
43475 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43484 arg "box-insert Frameless"
43492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43498 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43505 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43528 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43535 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43558 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43560 \begin_inset space ~
43569 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43578 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
43586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43592 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43593 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
43600 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43609 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
43617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43623 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43624 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43626 \begin_inset space ~
43635 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43644 arg "dialog-show character"
43652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43658 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43660 \begin_inset space ~
43663 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43670 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43679 arg "layout-paragraph"
43687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43693 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43695 \begin_inset space ~
43704 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43713 arg "thesaurus-entry"
43721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43727 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43741 \begin_layout Subsection
43742 View/Update Toolbar
43743 \begin_inset Index idx
43746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43747 Toolbar ! View / Update
43755 \begin_layout Standard
43756 \begin_inset Graphics
43757 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
43764 \begin_layout Standard
43765 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43771 \begin_layout Standard
43772 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43776 \begin_layout Standard
43777 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43783 \begin_layout Standard
43784 \begin_inset Tabular
43785 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
43786 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43787 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43788 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43789 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43812 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43819 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43828 arg "buffer-update"
43836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43842 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43849 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43858 arg "master-buffer-view"
43866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43872 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43874 \begin_inset space ~
43883 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43892 arg "master-buffer-update"
43900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43906 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43908 \begin_inset space ~
43912 \begin_inset space ~
43921 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43930 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
43938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43944 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43945 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43946 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43947 Synchronize with Output
43953 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43976 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43977 View (Other Formats)
43983 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43990 arg "update-others"
43998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44004 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44005 Update (Other Formats)
44018 \begin_layout Standard
44019 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
44023 \begin_layout Subsection
44027 \begin_layout Standard
44028 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
44029 \begin_inset space ~
44033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44035 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44039 , the table toolbar
44040 \begin_inset Index idx
44043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44052 \begin_inset space ~
44057 manual and the math macro toolbar
44058 \begin_inset Index idx
44061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44074 \begin_layout Chapter
44075 The Document Settings
44076 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44078 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
44083 \begin_inset Index idx
44086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44087 Document ! Settings
44095 \begin_layout Standard
44099 \begin_inset space ~
44104 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
44105 is called with the menu
44107 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44111 You can save your document settings as default with the
44113 Save as Document Defaults
44115 button in any dialog.
44116 This will create a template named
44120 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
44121 when you create a new document without
44125 \begin_layout Standard
44130 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
44131 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
44134 \begin_layout Standard
44135 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
44136 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
44137 to find the one you are looking for.
44138 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
44139 the submenus of the dialog.
44141 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44145 \begin_inset space \space{}
44149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44156 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
44157 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
44158 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
44161 \begin_layout Section
44165 \begin_layout Standard
44166 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
44168 Document classes are described in section
44169 \begin_inset space ~
44173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44175 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
44183 \begin_layout Standard
44187 \begin_inset space ~
44192 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
44197 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
44198 as a layout for a document class.
44199 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
44201 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
44210 \begin_layout Standard
44211 Some classes use special class options by default.
44212 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
44216 and you can decide to use them or not.
44217 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
44218 recommended you leave them untouched.
44223 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44224 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
44229 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44231 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
44236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44237 When you want to use one of the following drivers
44238 \begin_inset Newline newline
44243 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
44246 \begin_inset Newline newline
44249 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44250 distribution, see section
44255 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44257 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
44270 \begin_layout Standard
44275 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
44276 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
44277 in the background if the child document
44278 is opened without its master.
44279 This way child documents are always compilable.
44280 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
44287 \begin_inset space ~
44295 \begin_layout Standard
44296 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44307 \begin_inset Index idx
44310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44312 packages ! prettyref
44318 \begin_inset Index idx
44321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44323 packages ! refstyle
44328 for cross-references, see section
44329 \begin_inset space ~
44333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44335 reference "sec:Cross-References"
44342 \begin_layout Section
44346 \begin_layout Standard
44347 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
44348 Please refer to the section
44351 \begin_inset space ~
44359 \begin_inset space ~
44364 manual for details.
44367 \begin_layout Section
44371 \begin_layout Standard
44372 Modules are explained in section
44373 \begin_inset space ~
44377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44379 reference "subsec:Modules"
44386 \begin_layout Section
44390 \begin_layout Standard
44392 \begin_inset space ~
44396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44398 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
44405 \begin_layout Section
44409 \begin_layout Standard
44410 The document font settings are described in section
44411 \begin_inset space ~
44415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44417 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
44424 \begin_layout Section
44428 \begin_layout Standard
44429 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
44441 \begin_inset space ~
44446 and whether it should be a
44449 \begin_inset space ~
44454 can also be specified here.
44457 \begin_layout Standard
44458 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
44459 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
44460 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
44462 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
44465 \begin_layout Standard
44468 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
44471 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
44472 justifies the text on screen.
44473 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
44477 \begin_layout Section
44481 \begin_layout Standard
44482 This dialog is described in sections
44483 \begin_inset space ~
44487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44489 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
44494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44496 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
44503 \begin_layout Section
44507 \begin_layout Standard
44508 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
44509 \begin_inset space ~
44513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44515 reference "subsec:Margins"
44522 \begin_layout Section
44524 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44526 name "sec:Language-encodings"
44531 \begin_inset Index idx
44534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44535 Language ! Encoding
44543 \begin_layout Standard
44544 The document language and quote styles are set here.
44545 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
44546 (the \SpecialChar LyX
44548 is always encoded in utf8).
44549 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
44550 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
44551 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
44552 -command is not known for
44553 a particular character).
44556 \begin_layout Standard
44557 If you use the option
44562 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
44563 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
44564 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44566 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
44567 exactly one encoding.
44568 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
44571 \begin_layout Standard
44573 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
44574 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
44575 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44576 installation supports Unicode), choose
44577 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
44578 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
44579 is quite incomplete, so
44580 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
44585 (when \SpecialChar LyX
44586 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
44587 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
44588 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
44589 -commands is not used, because all
44590 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
44591 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44592 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44593 , two new alternative engines
44594 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
44596 Both engines support Unicode natively.
44598 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
44601 \begin_inset space ~
44609 \begin_inset space ~
44617 \begin_inset space ~
44623 \begin_inset space ~
44627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44629 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
44634 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
44638 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
44641 \begin_layout Standard
44645 \begin_inset space ~
44650 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44651 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
44653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44661 The possible settings are:
44664 \begin_layout Description
44665 Default uses the language package that is selected in
44667 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44668 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44672 \begin_inset space ~
44676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44678 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44685 \begin_layout Description
44686 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
44687 format you will use.
44688 In many cases this will be
44693 \begin_inset Index idx
44696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44704 If the newer package
44709 \begin_inset Index idx
44712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44714 packages ! polyglossia
44719 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44720 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44721 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
44723 this package will be used instead of
44730 \begin_layout Description
44732 \begin_inset space ~
44743 would be more appropriate.
44746 \begin_layout Description
44747 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
44748 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
44752 (for German texts), type in
44755 \begin_inset Newline newline
44760 usepackage{ngerman}
44763 \begin_layout Description
44764 None will not use a language package.
44765 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
44768 \begin_layout Standard
44769 Here is a list with the important encodings:
44772 \begin_layout Description
44774 \begin_inset space ~
44778 \begin_inset space ~
44782 \begin_inset space ~
44789 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44795 \begin_inset Index idx
44798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44800 packages ! inputenc
44806 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
44807 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
44808 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
44812 \begin_layout Description
44813 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
44815 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
44816 commands, which may result in a big
44817 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
44818 -commands are needed.
44821 \begin_layout Description
44823 \begin_inset space ~
44827 \begin_inset space ~
44830 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
44833 \begin_layout Description
44835 \begin_inset space ~
44839 \begin_inset space ~
44842 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
44845 \begin_layout Description
44847 \begin_inset space ~
44850 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
44853 \begin_layout Description
44855 \begin_inset space ~
44859 \begin_inset space ~
44862 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
44863 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
44866 \begin_layout Description
44868 \begin_inset space ~
44872 \begin_inset space ~
44875 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
44879 \begin_layout Description
44881 \begin_inset space ~
44885 \begin_inset space ~
44888 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
44889 ISO-8859-13 encoding
44892 \begin_layout Description
44894 \begin_inset space ~
44898 \begin_inset space ~
44902 \begin_inset space ~
44905 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
44906 \begin_inset space ~
44912 \begin_layout Description
44914 \begin_inset space ~
44918 \begin_inset space ~
44922 \begin_inset space ~
44925 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
44926 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
44929 \begin_layout Description
44931 \begin_inset space ~
44935 \begin_inset space ~
44938 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
44939 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
44940 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44941 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
44942 \begin_inset space ~
44946 \begin_inset space ~
44952 \begin_layout Description
44954 \begin_inset space ~
44958 \begin_inset space ~
44961 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
44962 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
44963 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44965 should try to use the encoding Unicode
44966 \begin_inset space ~
44970 \begin_inset space ~
44976 \begin_layout Description
44978 \begin_inset space ~
44982 \begin_inset space ~
44985 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
44988 \begin_layout Description
44990 \begin_inset space ~
44994 \begin_inset space ~
44997 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
45000 \begin_layout Description
45002 \begin_inset space ~
45006 \begin_inset space ~
45009 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
45012 \begin_layout Description
45014 \begin_inset space ~
45017 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
45020 \begin_layout Description
45022 \begin_inset space ~
45025 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
45028 \begin_layout Description
45030 \begin_inset space ~
45034 \begin_inset space ~
45037 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
45040 \begin_layout Description
45042 \begin_inset space ~
45046 \begin_inset space ~
45052 \begin_layout Description
45054 \begin_inset space ~
45058 \begin_inset space ~
45061 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
45064 \begin_layout Description
45066 \begin_inset space ~
45070 \begin_inset space ~
45076 \begin_layout Description
45078 \begin_inset space ~
45082 \begin_inset space ~
45085 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45091 \begin_inset Index idx
45094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45101 , when using this, set the document language to
45106 \begin_layout Description
45108 \begin_inset space ~
45112 \begin_inset space ~
45115 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45120 , when using this, set the document language to
45123 \begin_inset space ~
45129 \begin_layout Description
45131 \begin_inset space ~
45135 \begin_inset space ~
45138 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45144 \begin_inset Index idx
45147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45149 packages ! japanese
45154 , when using this, set the document language to
45159 \begin_layout Description
45161 \begin_inset space ~
45165 \begin_inset space ~
45168 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45173 , when using this, set the document language to
45178 \begin_layout Description
45180 \begin_inset space ~
45184 \begin_inset space ~
45187 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45192 , when using this, set the document language to
45197 \begin_layout Description
45199 \begin_inset space ~
45202 (EUC-KR) for Korean
45205 \begin_layout Description
45207 \begin_inset space ~
45211 \begin_inset space ~
45215 \begin_inset space ~
45218 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
45221 \begin_layout Description
45223 \begin_inset space ~
45227 \begin_inset space ~
45231 \begin_inset space ~
45234 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
45235 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
45236 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
45239 \begin_layout Description
45241 \begin_inset space ~
45245 \begin_inset space ~
45251 \begin_layout Description
45253 \begin_inset space ~
45257 \begin_inset space ~
45260 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
45261 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
45264 \begin_layout Description
45266 \begin_inset space ~
45270 \begin_inset space ~
45273 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45279 \begin_inset Index idx
45282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45289 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
45292 \begin_layout Description
45294 \begin_inset space ~
45302 \begin_inset space ~
45305 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
45312 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45315 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45322 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45323 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45325 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
45328 \begin_layout Description
45330 \begin_inset space ~
45334 \begin_inset space ~
45337 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45343 \begin_inset Index idx
45346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45353 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
45356 \begin_layout Description
45358 \begin_inset space ~
45361 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45367 \begin_inset Index idx
45370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45372 packages ! inputenc
45378 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
45382 \begin_layout Description
45384 \begin_inset space ~
45388 \begin_inset space ~
45392 \begin_inset space ~
45395 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
45396 \begin_inset space ~
45402 \begin_layout Description
45404 \begin_inset space ~
45408 \begin_inset space ~
45412 \begin_inset space ~
45415 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
45416 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
45417 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
45421 \begin_layout Description
45423 \begin_inset space ~
45427 \begin_inset space ~
45431 \begin_inset space ~
45434 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
45435 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
45438 \begin_layout Section
45440 \begin_inset Index idx
45443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45450 \begin_inset Index idx
45453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45460 \begin_inset Index idx
45463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45464 Color ! Shaded boxes
45470 \begin_inset Index idx
45473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45474 Color ! Greyed-out notes
45482 \begin_layout Standard
45483 Here you can alter the font color for the
45487 (default: black), for
45490 \begin_inset space ~
45495 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
45499 (default: white) and for
45502 \begin_inset space ~
45512 sets the color back to the default.
45515 \begin_layout Standard
45516 Clicking any button showing
45524 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
45525 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
45526 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
45527 later more quickly.
45530 \begin_layout Standard
45531 Note, if you change the
45534 \begin_inset space ~
45539 font color and use the option
45542 \begin_inset space ~
45547 in the document settings under
45550 \begin_inset space ~
45555 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
45556 \begin_inset space ~
45560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45562 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
45569 \begin_layout Standard
45570 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
45576 \begin_layout Standard
45580 \begin_inset space ~
45589 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
45592 \begin_inset space ~
45595 Code after a forced page break:
45598 \begin_layout Itemize
45599 For the page color:
45600 \begin_inset Newline newline
45607 pagecolor{color name}
45610 \begin_layout Itemize
45611 For the text color:
45612 \begin_inset Newline newline
45622 \begin_layout Standard
45623 You are restricted to one of
45659 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
45666 \begin_inset space ~
45672 \begin_inset Newline newline
45675 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
45676 names to refer to them:
45679 \begin_layout Itemize
45685 \begin_inset Newline newline
45690 page_backgroundcolor
45693 \begin_layout Itemize
45697 \begin_inset space ~
45703 \begin_inset Newline newline
45711 \begin_layout Itemize
45715 \begin_inset space ~
45721 \begin_inset Newline newline
45729 \begin_layout Itemize
45733 \begin_inset space ~
45739 \begin_inset Newline newline
45747 \begin_layout Standard
45748 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
45751 \begin_inset space ~
45759 \begin_inset space ~
45767 \begin_layout Section
45771 \begin_layout Standard
45772 Here you can adjust the
45776 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
45780 as described in section
45781 \begin_inset space ~
45785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45787 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
45794 \begin_layout Section
45798 \begin_layout Standard
45799 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45805 \begin_inset Index idx
45808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45810 packages ! biblatex
45820 \begin_inset Index idx
45823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45835 \begin_inset Index idx
45838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45846 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
45849 Sectioned bibliography
45851 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45857 \begin_inset Index idx
45860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45862 packages ! bibtopic
45872 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
45873 Finally, you can select a document-specific
45877 for the generation of the bibliography.
45878 For a further description of these possibilities see section
45879 \begin_inset space ~
45883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45885 reference "sec:Bibliography"
45892 \begin_layout Section
45896 \begin_layout Standard
45897 Here you can define the
45901 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
45903 \begin_inset space ~
45907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45909 reference "sec:Index"
45916 \begin_layout Section
45920 \begin_layout Standard
45921 The PDF properties are explained in section
45922 \begin_inset space ~
45926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45928 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
45935 \begin_layout Section
45939 \begin_layout Standard
45940 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
45941 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45947 \begin_inset Index idx
45950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45962 \begin_inset Index idx
45965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45977 \begin_inset Index idx
45980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45992 \begin_inset Index idx
45995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46007 \begin_inset Index idx
46010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46012 packages ! mathdots
46022 \begin_inset Index idx
46025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46027 packages ! mathtools
46037 \begin_inset Index idx
46040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46052 \begin_inset Index idx
46055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46057 packages ! stackrel
46067 \begin_inset Index idx
46070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46072 packages ! stmaryrd
46082 \begin_inset Index idx
46085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46087 packages ! undertilde
46092 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
46095 \begin_layout Description
46096 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
46097 -errors in formulas,
46098 ensure that you have this enabled.
46101 \begin_layout Description
46102 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
46103 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
46104 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
46108 \begin_layout Description
46109 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
46112 \begin_inset space ~
46124 \begin_layout Description
46125 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
46128 \begin_inset space ~
46140 \begin_layout Description
46141 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
46152 \begin_layout Description
46153 mathtools is used for the math commands
46189 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
46196 \begin_layout Description
46197 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
46199 Chemical Symbols and Equations
46208 \begin_layout Description
46209 stackrel is used for the math command
46226 \begin_layout Description
46227 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
46230 \begin_layout Description
46231 undertilde is used for the math command
46239 Accents for one Character
46248 \begin_layout Section
46252 \begin_layout Standard
46253 The float placement options are described in the section
46256 \begin_inset space ~
46264 \begin_inset space ~
46272 \begin_layout Section
46276 \begin_layout Standard
46277 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
46279 Program Code Listings
46284 \begin_inset space ~
46292 \begin_layout Section
46296 \begin_layout Standard
46297 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
46305 set to be used and set the
46310 The itemize environment is described in section
46311 \begin_inset space ~
46315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46317 reference "sec:Itemize"
46324 \begin_layout Standard
46325 You can furthermore specify a
46328 \begin_inset space ~
46333 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46334 command of the desired character.
46335 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
46342 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
46344 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46348 \begin_inset space \space{}
46352 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
46362 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
46363 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
46366 \begin_layout Standard
46367 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46375 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
46376 -packages in the preamble (menu
46379 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46380 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46383 \begin_inset space ~
46389 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
46393 usepackage{textcomp}
46396 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
46400 usepackage{amssymb}
46410 \begin_layout Section
46414 \begin_layout Standard
46415 Branches are described in section
46416 \begin_inset space ~
46420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46422 reference "sec:Branches"
46429 \begin_layout Section
46431 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46433 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
46440 \begin_layout Standard
46441 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
46444 \begin_layout Description
46446 \begin_inset space ~
46450 \begin_inset space ~
46453 Format: The format that is used when you enter
46454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46473 View Master Document
46474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46481 Update Master Document
46482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46489 menu or the toolbar.
46490 The default is set in
46492 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46493 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46495 \begin_inset space ~
46498 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
46502 \begin_inset space ~
46506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46508 reference "sec:File-Formats"
46515 \begin_layout Description
46517 \begin_inset space ~
46521 \begin_inset space ~
46524 Output settings for the menu
46526 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
46528 \begin_inset space ~
46534 For a detailed description see section
46536 Reverse DVI/PDF search
46541 \begin_inset space ~
46549 \begin_layout Description
46551 \begin_inset space ~
46555 \begin_inset space ~
46558 Options offers settings for the export format
46566 \begin_inset space ~
46571 will assure that the output follows exactly version
46572 \begin_inset space ~
46575 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
46579 \begin_inset space ~
46584 settings are described in detail in section
46586 Math Output in XHTML
46591 \begin_inset space ~
46600 \begin_inset space ~
46604 \begin_inset space ~
46609 is used for the size of equations in the output.
46612 \begin_layout Description
46614 \begin_inset space ~
46619 Save transient properties
46621 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
46622 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
46623 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
46627 \begin_layout Itemize
46628 the activation of change tracking
46631 \begin_layout Itemize
46632 the output of tracked changes
46635 \begin_layout Itemize
46636 the recording of the document directory path.
46639 \begin_layout Standard
46640 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
46641 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
46645 \begin_layout Section
46653 \begin_layout Standard
46654 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
46656 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
46658 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46660 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
46664 \begin_layout Standard
46665 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46666 -syntax is given in section
46667 \begin_inset space ~
46671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46673 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
46680 \begin_layout Chapter
46686 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46688 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
46693 \begin_inset Index idx
46696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46705 \begin_layout Standard
46706 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
46708 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46712 It has the following submenus.
46715 \begin_layout Section
46719 \begin_layout Subsection
46723 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46724 User Interface File
46725 \begin_inset Index idx
46728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46729 Customization ! of toolbars
46735 \begin_inset Index idx
46738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46739 Customization ! of menus
46747 \begin_layout Standard
46748 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
46749 interface (ui) file.
46750 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
46758 \begin_layout Description
46763 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
46766 \begin_layout Description
46773 the menu entries in popup context menus
46776 \begin_layout Description
46781 specifies the toolbar buttons
46784 \begin_layout Standard
46785 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
46786 and edit the entries.
46789 \begin_layout Standard
46790 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
46802 entries must be finished with an explicit
46827 and in the case of the
46828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46840 The syntax for the entries is:
46843 \begin_layout Standard
46844 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
46850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46873 \begin_layout Standard
46875 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
46878 All the \SpecialChar LyX
46879 -functions are listed in the menu
46881 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
46883 \begin_inset space ~
46891 \begin_layout Standard
46892 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
46898 \begin_layout Standard
46899 For example, assuming you use the menu
46901 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
46904 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
46908 \begin_layout Standard
46909 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
46915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46933 \begin_layout Standard
46935 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
46939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46950 to have the sixth bookmark.
46953 \begin_layout Standard
46957 \begin_inset space ~
46962 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
46963 's toolbar buttons.
46964 The currently available icon sets are compared in
46965 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46968 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
46976 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46980 \begin_layout Standard
46983 Enable tool tips in main work area
46985 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
46989 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46993 \begin_layout Standard
46998 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
46999 should display in the menu
47001 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47003 \begin_inset space ~
47011 \begin_layout Subsection
47015 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47019 \begin_layout Standard
47022 Restore window layouts and geometries
47025 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
47026 the last \SpecialChar LyX
47030 \begin_layout Standard
47033 Restore cursor positions
47035 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
47039 \begin_layout Standard
47042 Load opened files from last session
47044 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
47048 \begin_layout Standard
47051 Clear all session information
47053 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
47054 sessions (cursor positions, names
47055 of last opened documents, etc.).
47058 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47060 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47062 name "subsec:Backup documents"
47067 \begin_inset Index idx
47070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47079 \begin_layout Standard
47082 Backup original documents when saving
47084 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
47085 it was saved the last time.
47086 It is stored in the
47089 \begin_inset space ~
47095 \begin_inset space ~
47099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47101 reference "sec:Paths"
47105 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
47108 \begin_inset space ~
47114 The backup file has the file extension
47115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47129 \begin_layout Standard
47132 Backup documents, every
47134 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
47137 \begin_layout Standard
47140 Save documents compressed by default
47142 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
47143 \begin_inset space ~
47147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47149 reference "subsec:Compressed"
47154 This applies to newly created documents only.
47155 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
47158 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47159 Windows & work area
47162 \begin_layout Standard
47165 Open documents in tabs
47167 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
47171 \begin_layout Standard
47176 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
47181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47183 \begin_inset space ~
47187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47189 reference "sec:Paths"
47193 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
47200 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
47201 documents will be opened in the same running instance
47202 of \SpecialChar LyX
47204 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
47205 instance is created for each file.
47208 \begin_layout Standard
47211 Single close-tab button
47213 is checked, there will only be one close button (
47223 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
47224 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
47225 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
47229 \begin_layout Standard
47230 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47238 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
47239 before the change takes effect.
47247 \begin_layout Standard
47252 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
47254 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
47256 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
47260 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
47261 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
47262 and only want to close the view in once instance.
47265 \begin_layout Subsection
47267 \begin_inset Index idx
47270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47277 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47279 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
47286 \begin_layout Standard
47287 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
47291 \begin_layout Standard
47292 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47300 This section only deals with the fonts
47304 the \SpecialChar LyX
47306 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
47309 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47310 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47321 \begin_layout Standard
47322 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
47339 (depends on the system) as its
47342 \begin_inset space ~
47358 \begin_layout Standard
47359 You can change the font size with the
47366 \begin_layout Standard
47371 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
47373 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47376 points have the size of 1
47377 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47381 \begin_inset space ~
47385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47387 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
47392 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
47393 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47397 The sizes are explained in detail in section
47398 \begin_inset space ~
47402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47404 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
47411 \begin_layout Subsection
47413 \begin_inset Index idx
47416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47417 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
47424 \begin_inset Index idx
47427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47436 \begin_layout Standard
47437 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
47438 by choosing an item in the
47439 list and selecting the
47446 \begin_layout Standard
47447 By checking the option
47451 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
47454 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
47455 \begin_inset space ~
47459 \begin_inset space ~
47464 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
47467 \begin_layout Subsection
47469 \begin_inset Index idx
47472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47481 \begin_layout Standard
47482 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
47486 \begin_layout Standard
47491 enables previewing snippets of your document.
47492 This feature is described in section
47493 \begin_inset space ~
47497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47499 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
47506 \begin_layout Standard
47507 Checking the option
47510 \begin_inset space ~
47514 \begin_inset space ~
47518 \begin_inset space ~
47523 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
47526 \begin_layout Section
47528 \begin_inset Index idx
47531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47540 \begin_layout Subsection
47544 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47548 \begin_layout Standard
47551 Cursor follows scrollbar
47553 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
47557 \begin_layout Standard
47558 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
47559 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
47560 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
47563 \begin_layout Standard
47566 Scroll below end of document
47568 is self-explanatory.
47571 \begin_layout Standard
47572 In \SpecialChar LyX
47573 one can jump from word to word by pressing
47580 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
47582 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
47583 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
47586 \begin_layout Standard
47589 Sort environments alphabetically
47591 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
47594 \begin_layout Standard
47597 Group environments by their category
47599 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
47602 \begin_layout Standard
47607 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
47618 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47622 \begin_layout Standard
47623 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
47628 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
47629 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
47633 \begin_layout Subsection
47635 \begin_inset Index idx
47638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47645 \begin_inset Index idx
47648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47649 Settings ! Shortcuts
47657 \begin_layout Standard
47662 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
47664 Several binding files are available, among them:
47667 \begin_layout Description
47668 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
47671 \begin_layout Description
47672 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
47684 \begin_layout Description
47685 mac.bind a set of bindings for
47688 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47696 \begin_layout Standard
47697 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
47702 , and binding files for special languages.
47703 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
47704 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47708 \begin_inset space \space{}
47712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47720 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
47721 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
47722 will try to use the appropriate binding
47726 \begin_layout Standard
47727 Some binding files, like
47731 , only have a limited scope.
47732 When looking at the end of the file
47736 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
47739 \begin_layout Standard
47743 \begin_inset space ~
47747 \begin_inset space ~
47752 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
47753 in the selected key binding file.
47756 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47758 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47760 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
47765 \begin_inset Index idx
47768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47769 Key Bindings ! Editing
47777 \begin_layout Standard
47778 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
47779 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
47780 functions and the bound shortcuts.
47781 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
47784 Show key-bindings containing
47787 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
47788 Insert there for example as keyword
47789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47796 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
47797 functions that contain
47798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47806 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
47807 All \SpecialChar LyX
47808 functions are also listed in the file
47813 that you will find in the
47820 \begin_layout Standard
47821 For example, to add the shortcut
47829 , select the function and press the
47834 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
47835 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
47838 \begin_layout Standard
47839 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
47840 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
47842 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
47843 function names as a semicolon separated list.
47845 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
47850 \begin_layout Standard
47851 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
47854 \begin_layout Standard
47855 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
47857 The syntax of the entries is:
47860 \begin_layout Standard
47866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47885 \begin_layout Standard
47886 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
47887 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
47888 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47915 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
47916 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
47917 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
47918 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
47920 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
47924 , you needed to specify it as
47929 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
47932 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
47935 \begin_layout Subsection
47937 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47939 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
47944 \begin_inset Index idx
47947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47954 \begin_inset Index idx
47957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47958 Settings ! Keyboard Map
47966 \begin_layout Standard
47967 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
47968 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
47969 provides keyboard maps.
47970 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
47971 is a Romanian one, you can enable
47974 \begin_inset space ~
47978 \begin_inset space ~
47983 and select the keyboard map file named
47990 \begin_layout Standard
47999 keyboard map and, if you use the
48003 bindings, you can select the first and second with
48006 arg "keymap-primary"
48012 arg "keymap-secondary"
48015 respectively or toggle between them with
48018 arg "keymap-toggle"
48024 \begin_layout Standard
48025 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48033 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
48042 \begin_layout Standard
48043 You can also specify the mouse
48045 Wheel scrolling speed
48048 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
48052 Middle mouse button pasting
48054 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
48055 inserts the content of the clipboard.
48058 \begin_layout Standard
48066 \begin_inset space ~
48070 \begin_inset space ~
48075 you can select a key for zooming.
48076 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
48079 \begin_layout Subsection
48083 \begin_layout Standard
48084 Input completion is described in section
48085 \begin_inset space ~
48089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48091 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
48098 \begin_layout Section
48100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48107 \begin_inset Index idx
48110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48117 \begin_inset Index idx
48120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48129 \begin_layout Standard
48130 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
48131 are normally determined during
48133 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
48136 \begin_layout Description
48138 \begin_inset space ~
48141 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
48142 's working directory.
48143 It is the default when you
48154 \begin_inset space ~
48162 \begin_layout Description
48164 \begin_inset space ~
48167 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
48169 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48171 \begin_inset space ~
48175 \begin_inset space ~
48183 \begin_layout Description
48185 \begin_inset space ~
48188 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
48194 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48198 \begin_inset Newline newline
48202 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48214 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
48215 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
48223 \begin_layout Description
48225 \begin_inset space ~
48229 \begin_inset Index idx
48232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48238 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
48239 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
48240 \begin_inset space ~
48244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48246 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
48254 will be used to save the backups.
48255 \begin_inset Newline newline
48258 Backup files have the ending
48259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48269 \begin_layout Description
48271 \begin_inset space ~
48274 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
48275 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
48277 \begin_inset Newline newline
48284 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48290 You can edit this file with the program
48299 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
48300 in its preferences under
48303 \begin_inset space ~
48309 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
48314 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
48316 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
48317 in your \SpecialChar LyX
48323 and \SpecialChar LyX
48324 need to be running the same time.
48325 \begin_inset Newline newline
48328 The pipe is also used for the
48332 feature, see section
48333 \begin_inset space ~
48337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48339 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
48344 \begin_inset Newline newline
48347 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
48348 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
48349 \begin_inset Newline newline
48365 \begin_layout Description
48367 \begin_inset space ~
48370 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
48373 \begin_layout Description
48375 \begin_inset space ~
48378 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
48379 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
48380 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
48383 \begin_layout Description
48385 \begin_inset space ~
48388 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
48394 You only need to specify it if you are using
48398 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
48400 For \SpecialChar LyX
48405 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
48409 \begin_layout Description
48411 \begin_inset space ~
48414 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
48415 When \SpecialChar LyX
48416 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
48417 to find it on the system.
48418 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
48420 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
48422 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48426 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48429 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
48430 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
48433 \begin_layout Description
48435 \begin_inset space ~
48438 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
48439 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
48440 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
48441 code or in the document
48443 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
48445 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
48446 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
48447 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
48448 scanned for the input files.
48449 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
48450 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
48452 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
48453 compilation may fail for some documents.
48456 \begin_layout Section
48460 \begin_layout Standard
48461 Here you can insert your
48470 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
48472 \begin_inset space ~
48476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48478 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
48482 , to mark changes you make as yours.
48485 \begin_layout Section
48487 \begin_inset Index idx
48490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48491 Language ! Settings
48497 \begin_inset Index idx
48500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48501 Settings ! Language
48509 \begin_layout Subsection
48511 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48513 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
48520 \begin_layout Description
48522 \begin_inset space ~
48526 \begin_inset space ~
48529 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
48531 You can find its actual translation status here:
48532 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48534 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
48542 \begin_layout Description
48544 \begin_inset space ~
48547 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
48548 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
48549 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
48550 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
48551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48567 The most widespread language package is
48572 \begin_inset Index idx
48575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48582 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
48584 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
48585 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48586 come with the alternative
48592 \begin_inset Index idx
48595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48597 packages ! polyglossia
48602 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
48603 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
48609 The available selections are described in section
48610 \begin_inset space ~
48614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48616 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
48623 \begin_layout Description
48625 \begin_inset space ~
48628 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48629 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
48630 you can here specify the command to start the package.
48631 An example is the start command
48637 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
48639 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
48643 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
48659 selectlanguage{$$lang}
48664 \begin_layout Description
48666 \begin_inset space ~
48674 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
48675 command toggles the package on and off.
48678 \begin_layout Description
48680 \begin_inset space ~
48684 \begin_inset space ~
48687 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
48691 \begin_layout Description
48693 \begin_inset space ~
48697 \begin_inset space ~
48700 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
48704 \begin_layout Description
48706 \begin_inset space ~
48710 \begin_inset space ~
48713 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
48714 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
48715 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
48717 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
48724 \begin_layout Description
48726 \begin_inset space ~
48729 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
48731 When this option is not set, the
48734 \begin_inset space ~
48739 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48741 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
48744 \begin_inset space ~
48752 \begin_layout Description
48754 \begin_inset space ~
48760 \begin_inset space ~
48766 When it is not set, the
48769 \begin_inset space ~
48774 is set to the end of the document.
48777 \begin_layout Description
48779 \begin_inset space ~
48783 \begin_inset space ~
48786 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
48787 language will be underlined in blue.
48790 \begin_layout Description
48792 \begin_inset space ~
48796 \begin_inset space ~
48799 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
48800 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
48803 \begin_layout Description
48805 \begin_inset space ~
48808 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
48809 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
48810 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
48811 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
48814 \begin_layout Subsection
48818 \begin_layout Standard
48819 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
48820 \begin_inset space ~
48824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48826 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
48833 \begin_layout Section
48837 \begin_layout Subsection
48839 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48841 name "subsec:General-output"
48848 \begin_layout Description
48850 \begin_inset space ~
48853 search Commands that will be used for the menu
48855 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48857 \begin_inset space ~
48863 For a detailed description see section
48865 Reverse DVI/PDF search
48870 \begin_inset space ~
48878 \begin_layout Description
48880 \begin_inset space ~
48883 Options Options for the program
48887 that is used for the export format
48892 \begin_inset space ~
48896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48898 reference "subsec:Export"
48903 Possible options are listed in the
48908 \begin_inset Newline newline
48912 \begin_inset Flex URL
48915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48917 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
48927 \begin_layout Description
48929 \begin_inset space ~
48933 \begin_inset space ~
48936 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
48939 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48940 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
48942 \begin_inset space ~
48948 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
48951 \begin_layout Description
48953 \begin_inset space ~
48957 \begin_inset Index idx
48960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48967 \begin_inset Index idx
48970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48971 Settings ! Date format
48976 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
48977 \begin_inset Newline newline
48981 \begin_inset Flex URL
48984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48986 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
48992 \begin_inset Newline newline
48995 For example the format
48996 \begin_inset Newline newline
49000 \begin_inset Newline newline
49003 prints the date as day/month/year.
49006 \begin_layout Description
49008 \begin_inset space ~
49012 \begin_inset space ~
49015 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
49016 is allowed to overwrite on export.
49019 \begin_layout Subsection
49025 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49027 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
49032 \begin_inset Index idx
49035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49036 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
49045 \begin_layout Description
49047 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
49049 \begin_inset space ~
49057 \begin_inset space ~
49061 \begin_inset space ~
49064 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
49069 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
49090 are used for Cyrillic.
49091 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
49092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49104 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
49106 sets up in the background.
49107 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
49112 \begin_layout Description
49114 \begin_inset space ~
49118 \begin_inset space ~
49122 \begin_inset space ~
49126 \begin_inset space ~
49129 options They only have an effect when the program
49133 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
49136 \begin_layout Standard
49137 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
49138 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
49139 manuals of the applications.
49142 \begin_layout Description
49144 \begin_inset space ~
49147 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
49148 \begin_inset space ~
49152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49154 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
49161 \begin_layout Description
49163 \begin_inset space ~
49166 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
49167 \begin_inset space ~
49171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49173 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
49180 \begin_layout Description
49182 \begin_inset space ~
49185 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
49186 \begin_inset space ~
49190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49192 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
49199 \begin_layout Description
49205 \begin_inset space ~
49208 command Command for the program
49210 Check\SpecialChar TeX
49213 that is described in the section
49215 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
49220 Additional Features
49225 \begin_layout Standard
49226 There are additionally the following options:
49229 \begin_layout Description
49231 \begin_inset space ~
49235 \begin_inset space ~
49239 \begin_inset space ~
49243 \begin_inset space ~
49248 \begin_inset space ~
49251 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
49252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49269 to separate folders.
49270 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
49272 \begin_inset Index idx
49275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49282 \begin_inset Index idx
49285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49294 \begin_layout Description
49296 \begin_inset space ~
49300 \begin_inset space ~
49304 \begin_inset space ~
49308 \begin_inset space ~
49312 \begin_inset space ~
49316 \begin_inset space ~
49319 changes Removes all manually set
49325 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49326 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49328 \begin_inset space ~
49333 dialog when changing the document class.
49336 \begin_layout Section
49338 \begin_inset space ~
49342 \begin_inset Index idx
49345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49354 \begin_layout Subsection
49356 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49358 name "subsec:Converters"
49363 \begin_inset Index idx
49366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49375 \begin_layout Standard
49376 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
49377 from one format to another.
49378 You can modify converters or create new ones.
49379 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
49386 \begin_inset space ~
49391 field and press the
49396 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
49400 \begin_inset space ~
49405 drop-down list, modify the
49409 field and press the
49416 \begin_layout Standard
49419 Converter File Cache
49425 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
49427 Maximum Age (in days
49430 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
49431 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
49434 \begin_layout Standard
49435 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
49436 definition, is described in the section
49447 \begin_layout Subsection
49449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49451 name "sec:File-Formats"
49456 \begin_inset Index idx
49459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49466 \begin_inset Index idx
49469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49478 \begin_layout Standard
49479 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
49489 programs that should be used for certain formats.
49492 \begin_layout Standard
49493 You can also define the
49495 Default output format
49497 that is used when you use
49499 View, Update, View Master Document
49503 Update Master Document
49509 menu or the toolbar.
49512 \begin_layout Standard
49513 More about formats and their options is described in the section
49524 \begin_layout Standard
49525 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
49527 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
49528 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
49529 This is done by specifying a
49534 More about this is described in the section
49545 \begin_layout Chapter
49546 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
49548 \begin_inset Index idx
49551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49558 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49560 name "chap:Units-available-in"
49567 \begin_layout Standard
49569 \begin_inset space ~
49573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49575 reference "tab:Units"
49579 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
49580 and used in this documentation.
49583 \begin_layout Standard
49584 \begin_inset Float table
49590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49591 \begin_inset Caption Standard
49593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49594 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49609 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
49615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49617 \begin_inset Tabular
49618 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
49619 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
49620 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
49621 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
49622 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
49624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49668 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49672 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49705 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49709 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49771 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49775 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
49779 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49936 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49940 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49977 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50010 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50014 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50046 scaled point (65536
50047 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50051 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50114 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
50119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50238 % of original image width
50243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50327 \begin_layout Standard
50328 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50331 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
50338 \begin_layout Bibliography
50339 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50340 LatexCommand bibitem
50347 The \SpecialChar LyX
50349 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50352 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
50358 \begin_inset Newline newline
50362 \begin_inset Flex URL
50365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50367 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
50375 \begin_layout Bibliography
50376 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50377 LatexCommand bibitem
50378 key "latexcompanion"
50383 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
50385 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
50386 Companion Second Edition.
50389 Addison-Wesley, 2004
50392 \begin_layout Bibliography
50393 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50394 LatexCommand bibitem
50400 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
50403 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
50407 Addison-Wesley, 2003
50410 \begin_layout Bibliography
50411 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50412 LatexCommand bibitem
50421 : A Document Preparation System.
50424 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
50427 \begin_layout Bibliography
50428 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50429 LatexCommand bibitem
50439 The \SpecialChar TeX
50443 Addison-Wesley, 1984
50446 \begin_layout Bibliography
50447 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50448 LatexCommand bibitem
50454 The \SpecialChar TeX
50456 \begin_inset Newline newline
50460 \begin_inset Flex URL
50463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50465 http://texcatalogue.ctan.org/bytopic.html
50473 \begin_layout Bibliography
50474 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50475 LatexCommand bibitem
50481 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
50483 \begin_inset Newline newline
50487 \begin_inset Flex URL
50490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50492 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
50500 \begin_layout Bibliography
50501 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50502 LatexCommand bibitem
50509 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50511 name "Documentation"
50512 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
50519 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50523 \begin_inset Newline newline
50527 \begin_inset Flex URL
50530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50532 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
50540 \begin_layout Bibliography
50541 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50542 LatexCommand bibitem
50549 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50551 name "Documentation"
50552 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
50557 how to use the program
50559 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50563 \begin_inset Newline newline
50567 \begin_inset Flex URL
50570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50572 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
50580 \begin_layout Bibliography
50581 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50582 LatexCommand bibitem
50589 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50591 name "Documentation"
50592 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
50597 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50603 \begin_inset Index idx
50606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50608 packages ! biblatex
50614 \begin_inset Newline newline
50618 \begin_inset Flex URL
50621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50623 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
50631 \begin_layout Bibliography
50632 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50633 LatexCommand bibitem
50640 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50642 name "Documentation"
50643 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
50648 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50654 \begin_inset Index idx
50657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50665 \begin_inset Newline newline
50669 \begin_inset Flex URL
50672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50674 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
50682 \begin_layout Bibliography
50683 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50684 LatexCommand bibitem
50691 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50693 name "Documentation"
50694 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
50704 \begin_inset Newline newline
50708 \begin_inset Flex URL
50711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50713 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
50721 \begin_layout Bibliography
50722 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50723 LatexCommand bibitem
50724 key "makeindex-man"
50730 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50733 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
50743 \begin_inset Newline newline
50747 \begin_inset Flex URL
50750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50752 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
50760 \begin_layout Bibliography
50761 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50762 LatexCommand bibitem
50769 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50771 name "Documentation"
50772 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
50782 \begin_inset Newline newline
50786 \begin_inset Flex URL
50789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50791 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
50799 \begin_layout Bibliography
50800 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50801 LatexCommand bibitem
50808 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50810 name "Documentation"
50811 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
50816 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
50818 \begin_inset Newline newline
50822 \begin_inset Flex URL
50825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50827 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
50835 \begin_layout Bibliography
50836 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50837 LatexCommand bibitem
50844 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50846 name "Documentation"
50847 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
50852 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50858 \begin_inset Index idx
50861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50869 \begin_inset Newline newline
50873 \begin_inset Flex URL
50876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50878 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
50886 \begin_layout Bibliography
50887 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50888 LatexCommand bibitem
50895 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50897 name "Documentation"
50898 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
50903 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50909 \begin_inset Index idx
50912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50914 packages ! enumitem
50920 \begin_inset Newline newline
50924 \begin_inset Flex URL
50927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50929 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
50937 \begin_layout Bibliography
50938 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50939 LatexCommand bibitem
50946 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50948 name "Documentation"
50949 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
50954 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50960 \begin_inset Index idx
50963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50965 packages ! fancyhdr
50971 \begin_inset Newline newline
50975 \begin_inset Flex URL
50978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50980 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
50988 \begin_layout Bibliography
50989 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50990 LatexCommand bibitem
50997 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50999 name "Documentation"
51000 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
51005 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51011 \begin_inset Index idx
51014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51016 packages ! hyperref
51022 \begin_inset Newline newline
51026 \begin_inset Flex URL
51029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51031 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
51039 \begin_layout Bibliography
51040 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51041 LatexCommand bibitem
51048 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51050 name "Documentation"
51051 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
51056 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51062 \begin_inset Index idx
51065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51067 packages ! microtpye
51073 \begin_inset Newline newline
51077 \begin_inset Flex URL
51080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51082 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
51090 \begin_layout Bibliography
51091 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51092 LatexCommand bibitem
51099 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51101 name "Documentation"
51102 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
51107 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51113 \begin_inset Index idx
51116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51124 \begin_inset Newline newline
51128 \begin_inset Flex URL
51131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51133 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
51141 \begin_layout Bibliography
51142 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51143 LatexCommand bibitem
51150 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51152 name "Documentation"
51153 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
51158 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51164 \begin_inset Index idx
51167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51169 packages ! prettyref
51175 \begin_inset Newline newline
51179 \begin_inset Flex URL
51182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51184 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
51192 \begin_layout Bibliography
51193 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51194 LatexCommand bibitem
51201 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51203 name "Documentation"
51204 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
51209 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51215 \begin_inset Index idx
51218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51220 packages ! refstyle
51226 \begin_inset Newline newline
51230 \begin_inset Flex URL
51233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51235 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
51243 \begin_layout Bibliography
51244 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51245 LatexCommand bibitem
51252 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51255 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
51260 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51262 \begin_inset Newline newline
51266 \begin_inset Flex URL
51269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51271 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
51279 \begin_layout Bibliography
51280 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51281 LatexCommand bibitem
51288 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51291 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
51296 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51298 \begin_inset Newline newline
51302 \begin_inset Flex URL
51305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51307 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
51315 \begin_layout Bibliography
51316 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51317 LatexCommand bibitem
51324 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51327 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
51332 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51333 for Cyrillic languages:
51334 \begin_inset Newline newline
51338 \begin_inset Flex URL
51341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51343 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
51351 \begin_layout Bibliography
51352 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51353 LatexCommand bibitem
51360 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51363 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
51368 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51370 \begin_inset Newline newline
51374 \begin_inset Flex URL
51377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51379 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
51387 \begin_layout Bibliography
51388 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51389 LatexCommand bibitem
51396 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51399 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
51404 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51406 \begin_inset Newline newline
51410 \begin_inset Flex URL
51413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51415 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
51423 \begin_layout Bibliography
51424 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51425 LatexCommand bibitem
51432 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51435 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
51440 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51442 \begin_inset Newline newline
51446 \begin_inset Flex URL
51449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51451 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
51459 \begin_layout Standard
51460 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
51467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51494 \begin_inset Note Note
51497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51504 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
51505 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
51506 bibliography is the second one:
51514 \begin_layout Standard
51515 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
51516 LatexCommand bibtex
51517 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
51518 options "biblio/alphadin"
51525 \begin_layout Standard
51526 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51530 \begin_layout Standard
51534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51540 pagedeclaration}[1]{
51543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51549 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
51557 \begin_inset Note Note
51560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51561 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
51562 \begin_inset space ~
51566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51568 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
51580 \begin_layout Standard
51581 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
51582 LatexCommand printnomenclature
51588 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
51589 LatexCommand printindex